PART II ESSAY WRITING

Directions on essay writing:

1. You can write good essays: (a) if you can write correctly, (b) if you can express and
arrange your ideas on a subject.

2. Three Parts of an Essay:

(a) The Introduction. Write something in general about the subject of the essay in the
first paragraph.

(b)The Main Body. Write some paragraphs about the subject of the essay. You may write
one or more paragraphs about each main point. Write about some points only.

Try to discuss the subject in your essay. You may write some paragraphs in favour of the
subject and some against it, but only if the subject or topic permits.

(c) The Conclusion. Write something in the last paragraph of the essay as the conclusion.
You may write something general about the subject on the basis of the main body.

Generally, we have personal, descriptive, scientific, social or reflective essays. However,

most of the essays we write are mixed.

(A) About ’My’ Ideas and Experiences

1. My Future Profession or Vocation or Career (or) My Greatest Desire or Dream
(Mul., Pun.)

(You can write like this on any other profession like law, civil or military service,
business and journalism?) Outline:

1. The Introduction-Every student should have a definite (clear) aim in life.

2. My aim is to become a politician.

3. How I am preparing to become a politician.

4. What I shall do after entering politics.

5. The Conclusion-I am determined (have the firm intention) to achieve my aim. Every
student should have a definite aim in life. He (or she) should know well about

the profession he wishes to adopt (take up). He should make a careful choice of the
profession, and once he has chosen it, he should prepare well for it.

I aim to become a politician though it is extremely difficult to succeed in politics.

When I look at the past and present politicians of the world, I am filled with hope. So
many men and women coming of very ordinary families came to be successful
politicians. Some great presidents of the US like Abraham Lincoln and most of the
leaders of Russia and China were rather poor by birth. Our Quaid-i-Azam belonged to an
ordinary, middle-class family. I do not need much wealth or property to be a politician.
What I need is knowledge, ability and belief in high ideals (aims).

At present, I am an arts student, and my favourite subjects are political science and
economics. I study these carefully, with great effort. I know that only an able politician or
leader is ultimately (in the end) successful. Ability in politics is as much necessary as in
any other field of life.

The knowledge of political science will help me to understand the political affairs of my
country. It will help me to understand international affairs and the politics of other
countries. Then I shall also be able to follow the statements of their leaders.

The knowledge of economics will help me to understand the economic conditions of my

country. It will let me follow the economic policies of my country and of other countries.
It will enable me (make me able) to suggest ways of improving the economy (economic
system) of my country and raising the standards of living of the people.

I also study other subjects like history and sociology in order to improve my general
knowledge. Of course, I read newspapers and magazines nearly every day to keep my self
informed about my society and other societies.

Thus, I am preparing myself for active political life in future years after I have completed
my education. At present, I am a student of politics and of other subjects. I do not like to
take active part in the politics of my country as long as I am a student. I know if I
become a student-politician, I shall be making my future dark.

I may like to study law after getting the B.A. or M.A. degree. Then, I may start practising
law before entering politics. Or I may become an active member of a political party of
my choice, of course after the completion of my studies. Then I may fight for a seat of the
provincial or national assembly (in general elections).

As a political leader of my country, I shall work for its progress and glory (success and
honour). I shall try to serve my people to the best of my ability.

Firstly, I shall try to bring the most dangerous social evils to an end. I shall make public
speeches about the evils like bribery, black-marketing, hoarding and smuggling. I shall
tell the people, at as many places as possible, about different forms of injustice in society.
I shall start a campaign against injustice and corruption.

Secondly, if I get elected to the provincial or national assembly, I shall take part in its
discussions and make proposals for the betterment of my nation. I shall speak fearlessly
against the harmful policies of the government (if I am in the opposition). I shall try to
discuss the complaints of the people against the government or public officials. I shall
discuss the internal and external policies of the government, and point out their faults.

Thirdly, as a member of the ruling party, I shall help it to frame effective and useful
policies. I shall offer my well-considered advice to policy-makers for the progress and
welfare of the people. In case I am made a minister, I shall work hard to improve the
condition and working of my department. I shall resign if I think the government has
started acting against public interest.

I know that politics is a bed of thorns. The only flower that a true, dutiful and devoted
political leader can have is popularity. I am determined to enter politics because I have
decided to face its thorns and difficulties, and to work and £ie for the glory of my people.
I hope they will give me the flower, the ever-fresh flower of popularity.

2. My Idea of a Happy Life (or) Ideal Life

1. The Introduction-Our world is full of troubles.

2. Meaning of ”happy life’ or ”happy world.”

3. We can have a happy or ideal life:

(a) if we have perfect peace in society and in the world; (b) if human beings have enough
changes of making progress; (c) if human beings are prosperous (successful and happy)
in all parts of society or the world; (d) if there is perfect justice everywhere.

4. The people and the government should try to work for real progress and happiness. The
Conclusion-It is very difficult, though not impossible, to have a really happy world.
This world of ours is full of troubles. These troubles or evils are of many kinds. Millions
of human beings, in different parts of the world, are facing poverty, disease, injustice,
inequality, war, and so on.

A happy life or a happy world is one in which a person lives in comfort and is happy and
satisfied. This means he has enough income to satisfy his needr and to enjoy the comforts
of life. In addition, he is happy with his condition in life and enjoys satisfaction of the
heart. The entire world would be happy if we have good conditions of living in every
country or society.

Firstly, there should be peace. People should decide to settle all their problems or
disputes in peaceful ways. They should try to settle them through discussion or through
courts of law. but never by use of force. So also, countries should settle their disputes
through conferences and meetings between their rulers or governments. They should
approach world organizations like the UNO for the settlement of their disputes.

Secondly, human beings should have enough chances of making progress in all possible
ways. If a person has proper qualifications for a profession, he should be able to work and
progress in it. He should be able to get a job easily. He should get enough pay according
to the work he does (as he does it). It should be possible for all human beings to get
properly educated and to improve their knowledge.

Thirdly, human beings at all places and in all parts of the world should be prosperous.
This means they should have enough money to spend, proper houses to live in and good
clothes to wear. Parents should be able to get their children educated and trained suitable.
Old people should have proper incomes or pensions after their retirement from work. Ill
people should be able to buy medicines or have effective medical treatment in hospitals.

Fourthly, we should have perfect justice everywhere. The rights of everyone should be
safe and none should be allowed to trouble others in any way. All should be equal before
the law.

The life of all human beings can be truly happy if they try to make it so. All should
decide to work hard. The people and the government should work together for common
social and national aims. The UNO should make real ^efforts to establish world peace. It
should provide economic aid to poor or developing countries as much as possible. The
advanced countries should help the developing countries through the UNO or directly,
but not for political purposes.

It is, no doubt, very difficult to make our world happy. However, it may not be impossible
to do so. Let us decide to have peace, progress, prosperity and justice everywhere.

3. If I Were Born Again (P.U.)

1. The Introduction-I sometimes desire to be born again.

2. What I would ”do if I were born again.

3. What I would notdo-if I were born again.

4. The world would also be different if I am born again.

5. The Conclusion-I have yet to live a great deal. So why desire to be born again?
Sometimes I have the desire to be born again into this world. Then I begin imagining

(forming a picture in the mind of) what kind of person I would like to be if I really have
another life.

I have done some very creditable things (bringing honour or good name) in my life.
However, I have also committed mistakes like all human beings. If I come to have
another life, I would surely like to do better.

Firstly, I would like to do some good things of my life again. I would like to obtain all the
knowledge I have acquired (got) until now. I would like to form my good habits of life
again. For example, I would like to have the habit of speaking the truth in all
circumstances (conditions). I would like to have my habit of helping other people in
difficulty. I would like to have the high aims I now have before me. I would once again
desire to become a great writer, scholar (learned person) and leader of my people. I would
like to work for the cause of democracy and economic prosperity (progress and
happiness) of my people.

In my new life, I would like to learn some other languages besides (in addition to)
English, Urdu and Punjabi. For example, I would learn Arabic, Persian, and the Chinese
languages to get familiar with (have a good knowledge of) the cultures of the eastern
countries. Then I would like to travel to many eastern and western countries. Thus, I
would learn about the social, political and economic conditions in different parts of
world.

If I am born again, I would like to play some games that I have not played so far (until
now). For example, I would like to play football and tennis. I feel I have missed these in
my present life.

I would avoid committing some mistakes in my new life. I would avoid having some bad
habits that I had in the past or still have. For example, I would not be careless about my
health. In my new life, I would eat simple, healthful food and take enough exercise each
day. I would not waste my time as much as I have done until now. I would study in
school and at home more carefully choosing the most suitable subjects. However, I shall
also try to gain knowledge of other subjects in a general way.

I feel the world into which I may be born again will be very different from the present-
day one. There will be many more scientific inventions and modern machines and life
will be much more mechanical than at present. I do not know whether I shall be much
happy and contented (satisfied) in that world, but I can hope to live my life well,
according to my aims.

I also feel it is rather foolish to have all the ideas about my life after a second birth. I may
still live for a great deal of time in this world. It may be better for me to think about it
more and make my life better here. The present is in my hands, the future is a dream.

4. My Favourite Book

(You can write an essay on ”Books that Have Influenced Me” in the same way.) !• The
Introduction-I like Bertrand Russell’s book ”Common Sense and Nuclear Warfare” very
much.

2- Russell says that our world is facing the danger of a nuclear or atomic war.

3- Russell rightly says that rulers of powerful countries are making greater and greater
Preparations for war.

**• Russell wants all war to end.

5- Russell favours complete prohibition of all nuclear weapons.

6- Russell wants the United Nations Organization to become truly powerful.

”7- The Conclusion-Russell has written the book in a simple and interesting \vav.
I have read a good many books of general interest. Of all these I like Bertrand Russell’s
“Common Sense and Nuclear Warfare” most. This book is of a small size, but contains
deep thoughts. It provides useful information on the different problems and dangers of a
great war. Here we may consider some of Russell’s useful ideas.

Russell says our world is facing the danger of a great nuclear war. If a nuclear war takes
place, atomic, hydrogen and other bombs and nuclear weapons will be used by the big
powers. Nearly all the countries will be affected by this war. Most of them may get
destroyed. So, they should do something to remove this danger.

Russell rightly says that rulers or governments of powerful countries are making greater
and greater preparations for a big war. They are spending huge amounts of money on
producing nuclear weapons. Countries like Russia and America are preparing more and
more destructive weapons. Their scientists and technical experts are preparing bombs and
weapons which can destroy whole cities and kill million^ of human beings. It is also
possible that satellites sent into space by scientists may be armed with nuclear weapons.
Even the moon can be used by the US or Russia for purposes of nuclear attacks on other
countries.

Russell wants all kinds of wars to end. He thinks a smaller war can turn (change) into a
big nuclear war. To avoid war all nations or countries should become friendly.

Nations should stop having doubts about each other. Countries should stop trying to
dominate (have control over) others through war.

The most important part of Russell’s book is about disarmament (reducing the size of
armed forces). He rightly says that all kinds of nuclear weapons should be prohibited. All
the existing (present) stocks of nuclear weapons should be destroyed. If the big powers
stop making nuclear bombs or weapons, they will be saving a lot of money. They will
also not be in a position of fight a nuclear war to settle their disputes. There should be a
complete agreement among them not to produce nuclear weapons. Their scientific centres
or arms factories (plants) that can produce nuclear weapons should be open to inspection.

Russell wants the United Nations Organization to become truly powerful. It should be in
position to stop one nation from starting a war against another. There should be an
International Authority having its strong armed forces. This International Authority
should be capable of stopping one country from fighting against another.

Russell has written his book (Common Sense and Nuclear Warfare) in a simple and
interesting style. He explains his ideas well. We feel after reading the book that war is
really extremely harmful and destructive. Russell has not discussed defensive wars which
may sometimes be proper. However, when all countries agree not to fight, even defensive
wars will not be necessary.

Russell’s book is, of course, worth reading. It teaches good lessons to all the world. Let
rulers and politicians act upon these for the good of their countries and mankind
(humankind).

5. The TV Programme I Like Best

Though I like several TV programmes it is ”Mauj Darya” that I like most. It is an

interesting programme that deals with our social problems.

We have this programme every week in the evening, and when it starts, I run to my TV in
joy. It is in the form of a series of plays, speeches, discussions, interviews, stories, songs
and music. If one week we have drama, another week we have discussion, next we enjoy
stories, and so on. The new ”form” or ”shape” of the programme every week does not let
it become boring.

The subjects of ”Mauj Darya” are as different as the problems in our society. They can be
unemployment, overpopulation, corruption in different forms, smuggling, black-
marketing, the use of drugs, housing problems, marriage problems, educational problems,
the political situation in our country and in other countries, wars in different parts of the
world, terrorism, and so on.

If one week, for example, we have a drama on overpopulation or family planning,

another week we have a discussion on our educational problems. The most famous and
expert actors, directors and producers are associated with this programme. Such a
complex programme based on so many subjects cannot be a one-man show most of the
time.

In a surprisingly pleasant manner, ”Mauj Darya” at times suggests quite useful solutions
to our social problems. For example, in one of its educational sessions it made it quite
clear that the main trouble with our country was illiteracy or ignorance. The question
”How can we educate all our people well” was discussed by leading educationists and
some brilliant college and university students. They all agreed that the social system in
the country stood in the way of ”true education for all.” The social and economic system
needed an urgent reform. The end of the big landowners and capitalists could be the
beginning of proper education. These big lords did not want their millions of workers and
labourers or the poor children to study well.

The programme brings to our knowledge the country’s scientific and technological
progress through interviews, discussions and demonstrations. It will be highly beneficial
if we can view the latest scientific achievements around the world. For example, the
development of various computers, satellites, picture telephones, musical instruments and
surgical methods can be presented or dramatized interestingly.

A song with excellent music is usually presented at the end of each programme. It is
purely artistic and it pleases us with fine tunes, voices and verses.

Such a programme can continue for a long time without becoming a burden on the
viewers.
6. What I do not Like in Life

(You can write in the same way ”What I Like Most.”)

I think my likes and dislikes are not so uncommon. But there are some things that I ,
dislike more than others.

Firstly, I dislike telling lies. I think it is better to talk against a person to his face than to
lie to him or to misguide him in any way. Our Holy Prophet (may Peace be Upon Hun)
once said that if everyone started speaking the truth most of our personal and social
problems would be solved.

Secondly, \ hate (or abhor) bribery and cheating just as I would hate having the most
dangerous disease. When we give or get a bribe, we set an example. Others do the same
and bribery spreads around. Then those in authority will not easily help a poor Person
who cannot bribe them. In the same way, cheating others is an evil practice that spreads
fast. When, for example, someone cheats a person in business, he may begin cheating
others to make good his losses.

Thirdly, \ hate making a show of one’s wealth, position or power. It is the weakness of
most human beings to desire to look rich or important to others. Thus, we find Pe°ple
buying cars that are more expensive and buildings and houses that impress their
neighbors. This kind of show (or ostentation) makes many people spend more than they
earn. Thus, we find quite a few people spending on marriages beyond their means and
getting into debts. There are government servants who impose their position and power
on the public. When they do so or misuse their position, not only are they disliked but
hated. They become corrupt when they like to collect a lot of money to live in luxury or
to buy lands, houses o/cars.

Another quality that I hate most is ugliness. I like beauty in everything. Therefore, when
anyone makes an ugly picture or sings a song in an ugly way or does anything in an
unpleasant manner, I dislike it. However, in human beings I dislike ugliness of character,
not ugliness of the body.

7. A Memorable Function

It was in March last year that the debating society of our college arranged the final
function for the third and fourth year debaters. Most of our teachers, debaters and
prominent students of both the classes were present. When I reached college at about six
in the evening, I was happily surprised to find quite a few of my best friends there.

We were sitting on the green lawns with some fine beautiful flower trees around. Cold
drinks were served to the guests who were busy talking.

The Principal stood up a few minutes later and made a brief speech. He introduced some
new teachers and students to the listeners. Then he invited the most successful debaters to
speak to the pleasure of the audience (the hearers).

The debaters spoke in a light, humorous way and tried to do their best. One of my friends
among them made us laugh a good deal. He said college debating was going to help him
to select a girl to marry as women liked fine speakers. Soon afterwards, a girl debater
stood up and said that she liked able thinkers, men who had good brains. When my turn
came, I said too much of thinking was as bad as too much of speaking. Everyone laughed
at this. A teacher said it was difficult to control one’s thinking or speech.

The function continued late into the night. We had dinner, and then listened to music and
songs. A girl and a boy of our college and two guest singers from other colleges sang to
the music played by our music club. The audience joined the .singers in some love songs
and we forgot for some time where we were. After the Songs, we heard pure music,
which was also quite enjoyable.

After the music, we had some time for photographs. I still have some shots of the party
that I have kept on my study table. I refresh myself with sweet memories of this party
whenever I feel upset.

I made two new friends at the party. They were sitting across the table near my English
teacher. He introduced them to me saying they were the students of his fourth year class.
1 was very happy to meet them as their talk was interesting and their manners were
pleasing. They often met me in college afterwards and, helped me with my studies.

It was after ten tha; people started saying goodbye to each other. I did not feel like
leaving the place as I was still enjoying the pleasure of the company of my friends,
companions and teachers. However, like ever} activity, pleasant or unpleasant, the party
had to end. I stood up, and with unwilling steps started towards the college gate. While
returning home on my friend’s motorcycle, I was still hearing the music and noise oi me
party in my mind. I still enjoy it at times and desire to see all of those who were with me
on-that memorable night.

essay Writing

8. My Last Day in College

1. The Introduction-The last days of one’s long stay at a place are sadly memorable.

2. My experiences in classes on the last day in college-arrival at college-in classes talk

with teachers and students-emotional and mental reactions.

3 Visit to the cafeteria.

4. Visit to the hostel.

5. Visit to a variety show in the evening.

6 The Conclusion-Sad final return from college at night-no more college as a student.

The last days of one’s long stay anywhere are usually as sad as memorable. The place one
loves to stay in cannot be left for good (forever) without thoughts that bring tears to the
eyes and grief to the hearts. Who will not accept that the college is a place which a
student will never like to leave happily? It was perhaps my saddest experience that I
underwent on my last day in college, just before the preparatory holidays before the
present examination.

I got lip early in the morning thinking that I should go to college early and stay there late
finally to say farewell to the mother of knowledge, that is, my college. When I reached
there on the sunny April morning, the flowers were smiling and the trees were welcoming
me by stretching out their branches far into the air. Passing by the flowerbeds along the
long road covered with the most attractive trees of the area, 1 reached the main building
where I was to attend my first class of the day. It was the English language class and the
teacher, Mr. Tayyab Siddique, was standing before us smiling in his usual frank and
homely way. He shook his head at us, laughed a little and then kept quiet. ”What day is it
my students?” he asked us. ”Sir, it is Tuesday.” ”No,” he replied,” It is the last day for all
of us together.” Our teacher taught us a short poem by Wordsworth in a most moving
way, and then engaged us in conversation. He recalled some incidents in our class of
some minor quarrels and his own anger at them. Then he asked us to forget all past
bitterness and be friends again. He brought to our minds some pleasant happenings,
especially our outings together into the countryside and our cricket and football matches
in the college grounds.

The classes on the last day following the English class were full of interest and funr
There was teaching, but there were jokes and discussions too leading to some hearty
promises between teachers and students not to forget each other. After the classes, some
of us decided to go round the most favourite spots on the campus.

The first place we went to was the college cafeteria, the usual centre of refreshments,
jokes, gossips and petty quarrels. Mir Sahib sitting at the counter welcomed us feeling
our passionate moods. We had some cold drinks and snacks together and exchange^ our
addresses and discussed our future plans. As 1 stood up with my class-fellows to leave
the cafeteria, I felt the burden of thoughts and feelings crushing me heavily as we were
stepping out amidst the loud talk and clamour (loud confused noise) of other students
eating and drinking and making merry.

Inen we started for the college hostel, and passing over the green lawns and through
symmetrical hedges, reached the New Hostel. There I found several of our juniors,

ra year students, perhaps waiting for us anxiously T’^v were clapping and waving a !g
envelope directed at us. I went close to them, took the envelope, and at once pened it up
to find a beautifully written invitation to a variety show in the evening.
About half an hour later, I returned home from the hostel after a familiar chat with the
junior students and other friends.

In the evening, I returned to college to watch the variety show in the hostel which was, in
fact, a farewell show for the departing fourth year students. The singers and actors
surprisingly included our English and science teachers and junior and senior students. A
few guest singers from other colleges also took part in the variety i -•...-aj-.ime. The
Principal and Vice-Principal at the end spoke over the microphone narrating some fine
jokes and reproducing some experiences of their stay in the college concerning especially
the performance of the outgoing fourth year class in studies and sports. And, with the end
of the speeches, ended all our formal connections with our beloved college. The teachers
and students bade farewell to us with the best of wishes, and we bade farewell to them
with respect and love.

From the noises and laughter of the grand gathering in the spreading lawns of the college
we came out into the stillness of darkness and night. Weighed down with a heavy heart
and moving along the lonely road on my bicycle late at night, I was feeling the greatest
loss of my life-the loss of college life, for my parents were already planning to send me to
a university for post-graduate studies-and the maturity of university life was perhaps no
comparison with the simplicity and innocence of college life.

9. My Dreams

1. The Introduction-Dreams reflect one’s personality, desires, regrets and fears.

2. My dream of becoming a popular leader.

3. Dream of visiting interesting cities and countries.

4. Dream of devastating (ruinous) floods.

5. Dream of flying and forced (emergency) landing close to an African forest.

6. The Conclusion-Sleeping, dreaming and daydreaming we spend more than half of our
lives.

’’’Dreams, pleasant and unpleasant, are indicative of one’s personality. It is so because

what a person thinks about usually or what lies in his mind as desires, hopes or regrets is
easily reflected in his dreains. So it is with me, and here I shall like to show how my
dreams are mirrors in which I see my conscious and unconscious desires, regrets and
fears, and often a bright, resplendent (splendid) future.

Firstly, I may describe my dreams related to my desires and hopes. I had once desired as
a child to be a famous political leader. Now, when I am an undergraduate student, I feel
that, in my situation of life, I can never become a leader. So, when I lie down and go to
sleep, I sometimes begin dreaming that I am a prominent member of a national political
party and the common people like me very much. Whenever I travel along crowded roads
and through common markets, people on both sides greet me and cry in joy to see my
hands extended out of the car. Some of them come and shake hands with me, and even
kiss me expressing the desire that I should be the next Prime Minister. Elections are held
and in the end, I become the Prime Minister. Then in my dream I see myself bringing
about vast (big) changes in industry, agriculture, education anc1 business and thus
becoming a social and political reformer. This dream comes to an end whenever there is
an outside disturbance like someone ringing the bell or knocking at the door or when I
myself wake up.

The second dream that I often have relates to visits to the most interesting cities or
countries. I am very fond of travelling though I do not often get enough chances of

essay Writing

doing so. In my sweetest dreams, I am often voyaging on the high seas to distant ( off)
islands like Sindbad the sailor, Ibn-e-Batuta or Robinson Crusoe. There I live forests with
wild people eating fruit and roasted meat and drinking spring water a then dancing
around trees for hours on end (continuously) Sometimes I return home my dream, but
mostly I wake up abiuptly (suddenly) when I face a dangerous anin or a group of armed
people going to attack me.

The third dream that I sometimes have is really very frightful and horrible, concerns
floods bringing about large-scale destruction all around and causing a hu loss of life. In
my sleep, I find my house surrounded by floodwater. As the house is a considerable
height, it is beyond the reach of the street water, but I am strand (unable to go out), and
the fear of death with thirst and hunger looks me in the fa< Somehow, a boat reaches our
family with some helpers, and we board it. Soo however, the boat becomes unbalanced
and is going to sink that I wake up crying fear.

The fourth dream is perhaps most horrible, and it concerns flying and forced landinj In
my dream, I fly to far off places up to Iceland, Greenland, North and South Poles, visit all
the advanced countries, but on return to my homeland, the aeroplane engine develop
some trouble. The pilots force land on an African seacoast bordering a vas thick forest.
Soon some jungle animals start running towards us, and I cry loudly \\ fear and soon fall
down on the floor and wake up. I

The above dreams are the most common ones that I have every third or fourth dajj
Shakespeare says in ”The Tempest”: We are such stuff as dreams are made of.

More than half of our life we are sleeping or dreaming. We even daydream as we gc on
building castles in the air, lost in our imagination. My greatest hopes which art most
difficult to be fulfilled make me daydream. It is not so pleasant to have thi: experience
because when I wake up in the realities around are mostly ugly, unpleasan and
exceedingly (painful). The fairy world of dreams melts into the everyday ordinary world
of realities. Dreams surely are like a magician’s tricks which look very big anc solid but
are made up of airy nothings. But they are at times fit escapes into wonderlands and fairy
worlds of poetic beauty which I enjoy to the full before coming back to our humdrum
(commonplace) world. They, in fact, serve as fit safety values to release the pressure of
unfulfilled desires, hopes, longings, expectations and ambitions. (B) Educational Matters
& Student Affairs

10. Co-Education (P.U.)

1- The Introduction-Co-education (education of boys and girls together) in the modern

world.

2. Co-education in our country.

3- Advantages of co-education.
4. Disadvantages of co-education.

5- We may not be able to do without it at some places at least.

6- The Conclusion-We should make a proper use of co-education. Co-education is

common in almost all the advanced western countries like France,

Britain, Russia, America and Canada. It is to be found in a great many eastern countries
like Turkey, China, Japan and Nigeria and in other parts of the world like Australia and
South America.

Co-education is there in our universities, a few colleges and English-type schools in the
big cities. It is not to be found in most of our schools and colleges up to the
Intermediate and degree levels. In the future, we may be having a large number of
coeducational primary schools with women teachers in the majority.

There are surely some great benefits of co-education. Firstly, it gives a good training to
boys and girls to work together. While studying side by side in different classes they learn
to co-operate for common aims or purposes. After completing their education thev can
easily join different professions together. They can work together for common national
aims at scientific research centres, in hospitals and offices and even in factories to
increase national production. Boys and girls studying together can discuss their subjects
and can help each other in understanding them well. Boys may be able to understand and
know some subjects or their parts better than girls. They can explain and discuss them
with girls. So girls may be able to explain some other parts to boys in their own ways.
Co-education can make boys and girls compete with each other in studies. Both can try to
learn more and do better in discussions and at examinations. This can surely help raise
educational standards.

Co-education gives enough chances to boys and girls to study their subjects together from
highly qualified and exceptionally (unusually) able teachers. Both male and female
teachers, of good repute can teach in co-educational institutions. Such teachers are not
easily available in scientific and technical subjects like chemistry, biology, medicine,
engineering, and so on. Even in languages like French and German, we may not easily
find highly qualified teachers for the higher classes. Then male and female teachers can
work together and discuss their problems of teaching. They can cooperate in scientific
research or in advanced studies.

Co-education helps boys and girls to understand each other’s problems. Girls can prove
successful wives and boys successful husbands after the completion of their education.
They can work side by side for a better society as equal citizens.

Yet co-education has some disadvantages. Firstly, boys and girls studying together may
get more free than desirable in their dealings. They can meet and talk whenever they like
which is not so good from the religious point of view.

In co-educational institutions, girls cannot always take part in spprts, debates, etc. alone
with boys. They cannot often work actively with boys in college elections or at social
functions. They often have to make separate arrangements of their own for games or
other activities. However, these are not as good as those for boys or those in girls’
college. This gives a feeling of dissatisfaction to the girls.

It may not be possible to teach and explain all the parts of a subject to boys and girls
together. There are some topics in subjects like psychology and medicine which cannot
easily be discussed before both the sexes. As a result, the teacher may not be able to
explain them fully. Sometimes the teacher cannot easily talk about problems of girls
before boys and about those of boys before girls.

In spite of the disadvantages of co-education, we may not be able to do without it. At

least in our institutions of research and advanced studies co-education may be really
effective and useful. It will help our students to work together in different fields of life for
national progress. It may be advisable to have more co-education in our highest classes. It
is necessary to make a proper use of co-education in our institutions of higher learning. It
is possible to get the benefits of co-education and avoid most of the

Essay Hinting

11. Universal Education

1. The Introduction-Meaning of universal education.

2. Why universal education is needed in Pakistan and other developing countries.

3. Ways of giving universal education.

4. Difficulties in giving education to all the people of the country.

5. The Couclusion-Universal education means education for all the people of the country.
It means educating all the nation-men, women and children in cities, villages, and at all
places. There is a great need to educate our people. More than 70 per cent of

our people are still uneducated. We need universal education to be a really united and
strong nation. Educated people understand well the national aims.

If most of our people get educated, they can understand the value of unity and discipline.
They can co-operate in different fields of life. They can understand and work for their
own high aims and those of their nation and country. They can understand and obey the
law of the land and become good citizens.

Educated people can understand the political problems of their country and those of other
countries. They can follow (understand) the policies of their government. They can also
follow the programmes of different political parties. In elections, they can wisely vote for
those political parties or candidates whose programmes or policies they find to be
beneficial and useful. They can discuss the political, economic and social problems of
their country with one another and with their representatives or rulers.

Universal education with enable our people (make them able) to make proper industrial,
agricultural and technical progress. Educated people prove to be more efficient and useful
than uneducated people. They can work in proper and sensible ways in offices, factories,
and shops, on farms and at other places. They can learn new and effective ways of using
machines for different purposes. They can increase (add to) national production very
much. They can learn different technical skills for industrial and agricultural work.
Uneducated people cannot easily do all this.

Universal education should be given on a revolutionary basis. All the illiterate adults
should be able to write letters and to read newspapers and to understand social and
national problems. Those who can afford (or bear) the expenses of education should be
made to pay. Otherwise, adult education should be free. University and college students,
unemployed educated persons, retired government servants; military officers and others
can take part in the universal education programme of the government.

Universal education can be made compulsory for all the uneducated. Within the space of
five to six years, all the young and old persons, in every village and town, should be able
to read and write. We should open big education centres at central places in villages,
towns and cities. These centres should have morning, afternoon and night classes. All
kinds of buildings, even those of banks, government offices, clubs, shopping centres,
besides those of schools and colleges can be used for classes on

holidays and at late hours.

A national adult education organization may be established. It may be under the control
of the central and provincial governments at different levels. Educational experts should
formulate (prepare) adult education programmes.

There can be a common fund for universal education. Rich landowners and industrialists,
banks and commercial organizations should contribute to this fund. The government can
levy a special tax on people with higher incomes to meet the expenses of universal
education. Then the government can itself provide money from its treasury. All the
money so collected can be used to construct buildings, and halls, and for employing
teachers and for buying books for the uneducated.

Universal education will bring the light of knowledge to many of our dark homes. The
government and the people should co-operate to make universal education a possibility
and a fact.

12. Adult Education

1. The Introduction-Meaning of adult education.

2. Different kinds of adult education.

3. Great benefits of education.

4. Ways of giving adult education.

5. The Conclusion-We should educate the uneducated as soon as possible.

Adult education is education given to the adults or grown-up people of a country in

different forms. It generally means teaching uneducated adults how to read and write. But
it also means teaching them the ways of working efficiently in their different professions
or places of work. It may also mean teaching them better ways of living, enjoying life or
making use of their time.

Adult education is necessary in a country like ours. About 75 per cent of our adults are
uneducated and illiterate (unable to read and write). They cannot easily learn new ways of
doing work in their different professions. Consequently (as a result), they cannot easily
progress or earn much.

Through proper adult education, our working people can become more useful for the
society and the country. They can serve their nation well by learning better ways of
working on their jobs. Educated labourers can easily learn ways of working new
machines. They can read books about the different techniques of production. Thus, they
can become efficient industrial workers and can increase (add to) the production of their
country. When they work well they will be able to get higher wages. Educated farmers
can easily learn new and better ways of cultivating their fields and growing crops. They
can learn to use and repair tractors, harvesters, tube-well engines and other farm
machines.

Educated adults know or understand their rights and duties and the laws of the country
much better than uneducated people. They can read newspapers and magazines and can
learn about social and natural problems. They can discuss the political, social and
economic aims of the government and the programmes of political parties. Then they can
elect the most suitable candidates for positions of power.

Ministers, members of Parliament and the Provincial Assemblies, educationalists, social

workers and economic experts should discuss the ways of educating the common people
in the mass media (the radio, television and newspapers). Then they should formulate
(give shape to) a national adult education plan. Under the plan, the central and provincial
governments can pool (put together) their resources to make it a success.

Under the national education plan, literacy centres can be set up in every part of the
country. AH kinds of buildings, like those of schools, factories, Union Council Halls,
hotels, restaurants and government offices can be used. Temporary structures for teaching
can be erected, especially in the villages. Teaching can be more effective through
television and radio programmes, films, discussions and practical demonstrations of
teaching materials. Education can be divided into different categories-teaching the people
how to read and write, religious education, professional education to make the people
better workers, social education to make them better Jti/ens, and so on. Women can be
specially educated in other fields too, for example. in se\uni*. cooking and looking after
their children.

Our schools, colleges and universities can provide adult education. Special classes for
adults can be nc’d there after the regular classes are over. There adults can be taught
languages like Urdu and English

13. Disadvantages of Illiteracy

1 . The Introduction-Illiteracy, a curse (cause of ruin) - has no advantage.

2 Illiterate people cannot gain knowledge through books, newspapers, etc.

3. Illiterate people cannot easily know their rights and duties in society.

4. Illiterate people cannot make much progress in life.

5. Hie country or nation as a whole cannot progress when the majority of the people are
illiterate.

6. The Conclusion- We should make efforts to educate illiterate people.

Illiteracy is a curse for any nation or country. It has no advantage at all. Its disadvantages
are many.

The first great disadvantage of illiteracy is that uneducated (or illiterate) people cannot
gain any knowledge through books, magazines or newspapers. They cannot learn
anything ne\\ through reading. This means they are at a great disadvantage as compared
to educated people.

The second great disadvantage of illiteracy is that illiterate people cannot know \vell
about their rights and duties in society. They cannot easily understand the laws of the
countrx . the policies of the government and the programmes of different political parties.
It has been well said that illiterate people do not know how to use their democratic rights.
They cannot wisely elect their representatives.

.Perhaps the greatest handicap (disadvantage) of illiterate or uneducated people is that

they cannot make much progress in life. They cannot get good government jobs and
cannot join the armed forces. They cannot very well run shops or take part in trade or
industry. Illiterate villagers cannot easily learn the ways of advanced or modern farming,
and so remain poor and backward.

Only properly educated people can promote the agriculture, frade and industry of the
country in suitable ways. Scientists, engineers, doctors, scholars (learned men),
philosophers, writers, poets and artists arise out of educated and literate people. Illiterate
people can at the most work, with their hands or do ”manual” labour, thinking less and
struggling more.

We should make the best efforts to educate the illiterate people. The government and the
educated people should work together to bring illiteracy to an end.
14. Examinations-Our Examination System

1. The Introduction-Examinations are useful in several ways.

2. The value and importance of examinations has become less in recent times. Reasons
for this.

3. Our present examination system and the ”semester system.”

4. Our examination courses should be modernized. They should be in agreement with our
needs.

5. Exams should be arranged and conducted honestly and well.

Examinations are of great use. Examinations are a means (way) of judging or knowing
the ability of candidates. Good results in examinations are taken as a sign of knowledge
and ability.

The value and importance of many of our examinations has become less in the last few
years. There have been emergencies in our country one after another. Students could not
study their subjects well over long periods of time. So examinations had to be made easy
or a lot of choice had to be provided in question papers. As a result, the candidates taking
those examinations could depend upon some parts of their courses to pass. Students, as a
whole, got used to common kind of questions in the papers. The students getting degrees
after passing these examinations felt they did not have enough knowledge of their
subjects.

Another reason for the decrease in the importance of examinations is the teaching
standards. Because of uncertain social conditions, our teachers, like the students, have not
been able to attend to their work very well. Sometimes they had to cover long courses
over short periods of time. Or they had to leave out portions of the courses to prepare
students for examinations. Because of the absence of facilities of research or advanced
studies, quite a few of our teachers, especially in the sciences, could not improve their
knowledge adequately (suitably). All this affected the examination (and education)
system very badly.

In our examination system, examinations of most of the classes are held once a year. In
most of the schools, colleges and universities students are prepared for their annual
examinations. This gives them a chance to study their books for a few months or weeks
before their examinations. Quite a few students can easily neglect their studies for the
greater part of the year. Only in some educational institutions students have to do class or
sessional work under strict supervision of teachers.

In the 1970s, we experimented with the ”semester system” of exams. It was hoped that
sessional tests after every one, two or three months would, make our students more
careful. The system failed because of overcrowded classes and absence of good teaching
and library facilities.

Our examinations should be real means of judging the students’^theoretical and practical
ability. The students should be able to answer examination questions on the basis of real
understanding of their subjects. They should give a proof of their intelligence. Memory of
the answers to some questions should not be enough to pass.

The courses for our examinations should include (contain) the new developments in the
arts and sciences around the world. That is, these courses should be made as much
Modern and useful as possible. In the arts, they should include proper details of our
history, culture and religion and should be in agreement with our national aims and
purposes.

All our examinations should be arranged and conducted honestly and efficiently.
Examiners and persons responsible for the conduct of examinations should be men of
ability and high principles. Then the results of examinations should be declared as early
as possible.

15. Students and Politics

1. The Introduction-Students are very interested in politics.

2. The most important thing for students is to study.

3. Quite a few students do not study well, but like to take active part in politics.

4. Students taking active part in politics cannot study well.

Essay Writing

159

5. Students should increase (or add to) their knowledge of politics, but should not take
active part in politics.

6. Students of the voting age may vote.

7. Students should be above party politics.

8. The Conclusion-Students are generally interested in politics these days and try to be
politically active. The question arises whether they should take active part in politics or
not.

The most important duty of students is to study their subjects well. They should attend
their classes regularly and listen to their teachers attentively. They should increase their
knowledge with the help of their teachers and other men of learning and through
discussions.

In fact quite a few students do not properly study in schools, colleges and universities or
at home. They show much interest in politics, and discuss political matters with each
other and sometimes with members or leaders of different political parties. Some also try
to become members of political parties and then begin supporting them.

Those students who take active part in politics cannot learn their subjects or increase their
knowledge well. They cannot attend their classes or study their books regularly.

In fact the political activities of students have a deep effect on their minds. They begin
taking politics to be more important than studies and even begin trying to become
political leaders. They try to win the support of their fellow students First of all. Then
they try to make political statements (on the country’s politics) in newspapers or at public
meetings or in processions.

It is beneficial for students to increase the knowledge of the politics of their country and
of other countries. They should try to know about the policies of their government as well
as about the political and military events around the world. To know all this they may
read newspapers and magazines or listen to the speeches of political leaders on the radio
and television. They may even meet important political leaders at times to know their
views on various social problems.

In any case, students should not try to take active part in politics by joining processions
or demonstrations or even by attending public meetings. Often they are not in a mood to
study their books for days together after a little of political activity.

Students of the voting age may vote in elections. They may try to learn about the political
programmes of different political parties. However, they should never join political
parties or become their active workers.

Students should be above practical politics. Now they have to build and reconstruct their
country. The country needs able engineers, doctors, scientists, administrators (those who
manages public affairs), teachers and workers in different fields. Students should study
their subjects attentively and remain away from politics. Those who become politicians
after a proper completion of their education will be men of ability knowing how to solve
(or resolve) the country’s problems.

Students may learn about politics as much as they can. They should not, however, take
active part in politics.

16. Student Unrest-Their Problems (or) Why are Students Dissatisfied?

1. The Introduction-Student unrest is common in the world.

2. Student unrest is part of social unrest.

3. Causes of Student unrest: u v^

(i) Economic reasons of student unrest-poverty of most of our students. (//) Political
•easons of student unrest-students taking part in politics. (///) Bad social and economic
;onditions-a main cause of student unrest-unemployment, different evils in society.
Dissatisfied teachers, (iv) Overcrowding in our educational institutions, (v) Students not
having enough facilities of playing games or means of entertainment. Military training is
good for students.

4. Ways of ending student unrest.

5. The Conclusion-We should remove the causes of student unrest.

Student unrest is to be seen in many countries of the world today. In almost all the
democratic countries, students show at times their unrest through s’trikes, processions

and demands of different kinds.

We know well there is general social unrest. Most people are unhappy and dissatisfied
with their condition. The parents and families of the majority of students are quite
dissatisfied because of the dangers of war, rising prices,of things of daily use, increase
(rise) in crime, and so on, When others in society are dissatisfied before them,

students too become so.

There is an economic reason for student unrest. Many students, especially in the
developing countries like ours, are poor. Their parents cannot easily meet their expenses.
When they cannot easily buy good clothes or books they get dissatisfied. They feel all the
more dissatisfied when they find students coming of rich families enjoying all the
comforts and luxuries (things of comfort and enjoyment).

Another great cause of unrest among students is their interest in active politics. Some of
them work for political parties. Students favouring different political parties even openly
clash and fight which causes a great deal of unrest.

Bad social and economic conditions are very much responsible for student unrest. For
example, large-scale unemployment sets them thinking that their studies and degrees may
not very well help them in getting employed. Evils like fraud, falsehood, injustice and
inequality upset the minds of the students. Many of our teachers do not enjoy good
positions in society, and so become dissatisfied with their profession. Some really able
and efficient teachers leave the teaching profession for professions bringing more money.
All this creates feelings of unrest among the students. There is overcrowding in most of
our educational institutions. Teachers have to teach

very large classes. They cannot pay attention to each student to remove his difficulties.
Harmful films, novels, magazines and pictures about crime and sex have disturbing
effects on young minds. Foreign films and publications about crimes like murder and

robbery promote criminal ideas and thinking. Films and TV programmes about the

artificial (or outward) life of rich and showy people make us uneasy and restless. Many
students do not get chances to play games or enjoy themselves in their free

time. This makes them dissatisfied. There should be quick economic and scientific
development. This will increase the

incomes of the people. They will be able to provide their children with more

educational and other facilities. Students should learn to live a life of simplicity and
hardship. They should be told

about their national aims and purposes and the ways of achie\lng them in all

circumstances (conditions).

161

ssay LUnting

No political party or leader should encourage students to take active part in politics.
Parents, teachers and other responsible people should advise students to remain away
from politics.

The government and the people should work together to end social evils of inequality and
injustice. Social conditions should be improved. Students should be able to get employed
after the completion of their studies.

There should be many more educational institutions to avoid overcrowding. Then there
should be really able and efficient and well-paid teachers

17. Life in a College Hostel (Pun., Mul.)

1. The Introduction-College or university life is the most enjoyable part of a person’s

life. In a hostel he enjoys it all the more.

2. In a hostel a student becomes regular in studies and games.

3. In a hostel a student learns to live quite independently.

4. A student in a hostel learns to co-operate.

5. The pleasures and enjoyments of hostel life are many.

6. Comforts and atmosphere of the home not there.

7. The Conclusion-A student remembers his hostel life forever.

No doubt college or university life is the most enjoyable part of a person’s life. If he stays
in a hostel, he enjoys it even more.

Hostel life makes a student regular in studies and games. The time for studies and games
is usually fixed, and their teachers or supervisors watch students. The atmosphere of a
good hostel is such that it makes a student interested in his regular activities. He likes to
move ahead and to do better than others. If he falls behind the senior students, the
teachers can help him to improve himself. Thus he finds himself engaged in a happy
competition. Not only in studies and sports, in other matters like student management of
the hostel dining hall, library, common room, indoor games and debating and other clubs
he can work and gain valuable experience.

In any case, a student learns to live independently in a hostel. He cannot get his parents’
or elders’ help as he can at home in practically every matter. Sometimes he has to take
decisions independently, for example, whether to go on a trip organized by the college or
to participate (take part) in a college function. He chooses his friends and companions
himself and decides what he may do in his free time. Later in practical life, he can adjust
himself to changing conditions and circumstances rather easily.

In a hostel, a student learns to co-operate. In various different matters like cleaning the
rooms and corridors, getting the clothes washed or providing facilities to some guests
from another college or new students in the hostel he helps others and gets help in return.
Hostel life, in this sense, is corporate or group life in which the problems of one are, on
many occasions, the problems of all.

The pleasures and enjoyments of hostel life are many. We can have friends to our liking.
We can play different games in the college lawns or in the common room We get the
greatest enjoyment of life in the company of students like us learning, playing, working
and eating together. Without the experiences of hostel life, in our opinion, the life of a
student remains incomplete in several ways.

At times students in hostels feel homesick and wish to be with their parents and relations.
It is natural for them to miss the atmosphere and comforts of the home where they were
born. But then the pleasures and activities of hostel life remove much of the
homesickness.
should be made to understand social and political problems and to think correctly and
behave properly (appropriately) according to their ages. Without doing this, a stable and
balanced democracy and government cannot be brought into being. Nor can social and
economic progress be ensured. Nor can religious .tolerance (fair understanding of each
other), mutual respect and even self-respect be possible. To have a whole army of well-
educated, properly trained and handsomely paid teachers large amounts of money will be
needed. To us it is necessary to forcibly get a major part of the money from the feudal
Cjagirdar’) lords, industrialists and capitalists through a special education tax or by
taking away parts of their land holdings and properties and setting their income aside for
the education of the common people.

Secondly, at the higher levels, say after matriculation, the courses or syllabi should be
such as to enable our students to get employed gainfully in different professions-.
Education: thus, should be job-oriented with a view to reducing unemployment and
increasing productivity. Scientific, technical and technological education of the highest
order is the need of the hour. For this purpose, a chain of technical and vocational
(professional) schools and colleges in urban (city) as well as rural (village) areas geared
to (dependent on) the needs of our cotton, steel, light and heavy industries of all kinds
should be set up immediately. With rapid industrialization and mechanization of
agriculture, we shall need technically qualified people in large numbers everywhere. With
the spread of education on all sides, the sons and daughters of workers, farmers,
carpenters, masons and all sorts of office and other workers in all walks of life can get
educated in our newly set up technical institutions.

Thirdly, there should be much greater scope for original research in our universities, post-
graduate colleges, and higher seats of learning. For example, our physics and chemistry
departments can research on the uses of atomic energy in Pakistan, the substitutes for oil
in its use in cars, buses, trains, planes, factories and in different kinds of machines. The
uses of the special kind of coal found in Pakistan in very huge quantities can be
experimented and explored in our laboratories. For all this, superb educational planning is
needed.

Fourthly, we cannot close our eyes to the fact that the social and economic system of the
country is inescapably (inextricably) connected with the education and progress of the
common people. We have to break up the age-old feudal (’jagirdari’) system in our
villages and the monetary dictatorship of our big industrialists, capitalists and traders in
the cities to get money and resources and freedom to teach the illiterate millions of poor
people living in the ”darkness of the caves” at the start of the 21st century. Unless a just
and equitable (just and fair) economic system is not established and the social class-
structure of the too wealthy and the too poor is not broken, the millions of farm labourers,
tenants and ordinary people in the cities will remain backward and uneducated for many
more decades to come. (A decade equals 10 years.) We should, in the ultimate (final)
analysis, reshape our whole education system from the primary to the university level.
These changes should be according to our changing needs with the changes in our social,
political and economic system. Universal education, after the break-up of the old system,
will create awareness (knowledge and understanding) among the people as a whole. Then
the continuation of education at the upper levels in a progressive and. more or less,
uniform manner will be possible.

20. Fashions Among Students (or) Fashions and the Modern Youth

minting

1 The Introduction-Students are very fond of fashions.

2 Different popular fashions among male and female students.

3 How fashions begin.

4 Results or effects of fashions.

, The Conclusion-Students should try to be simple.

165

students are generally fond of fashions. They try to be as fashionable as possible.

There are different popular fashions among the youth. These fashions are mostly of

lothes, shoes, hair and make-up. There are also the ’fashion’ of walking, talking, laughing
or behaving in definite ways. However, all these fashions change with time. Girls wear,
long or short shirts and ’’shalwars” or ”saris.” They like to wear tight or loose clothes
according to the fashion. A number of girls have their hair cut or specially dressed in
fashionable ways. Their ways of using powder, lipstick, etc. on the face also go on
changing. Girls particularly attend to the fashions of colours of their clothes or shoes.

Boys also try to wear clothes according to the latest fashions. They wear tight or loose
pants, shirts having collars and sleeves of one shape or the other and specially sewn
coats. They wear shoes with pointed or flat toes. They have their hair cut in the most
fashionable ways. Those students who have their faces shaven sometimes begin keeping
moustaches. Now the ”awami suit” is much in fashion.

New fashions among the students come into being for different reasons. Firstly, rich and
well-to-do students generally like to have changes in their fashions of the dress. Some of
these students begin wearing clothes in new ways to become prominent. Others also
begin copying their new fashions. Thus, fashions are the result of the desire for newness
in the ways of wearing different kinds of clothes. Second, studentwatching films often try
to copy the fashions of actors. They may even try to copy their ways of speaking, walking
and general behaviour. These fashions become popular when a large number of students
adopt them. Third, students watching television may begin adopting fashions of those
appearing on the screen. Fourth, students may begin copying the fashions of foreigners
visiting their country. Mostly male students do so in our country. There may be other
causes of new fashions. Tailors themselves may sew clothes in new ways and make some
fashions popular.

It is true that while fashions make life interesting and colourful they make us active and
smart. Students wearing fashionable clothes feel happy and satisfied. Different fashions
cause variety in society.

Fashions also have quite a few bad results. A great many fashionable students are more
interested in their fashions than in studies. They spend too much of their time getting new
sorts of fashionable clothes instead of buying useful books.

Those parents who are not rich or well to do find it very difficult to provide new
fashionable clothes to their children. If students are not so fond of fashions, they can save
their parents much worry and trouble.

Fashions can affect our social attitudes for the worse. Fashionable people at times tegin
hating those who are poor and cannot dress themselves in so Modern a manner.

w fact, our students should be as simple as possible. They should try to attend to their
studies more and to fashions Jess and make the best use of their time.

21. Our National Language (Urdu) (Bwp.)

• The Introduction-Every advanced country has its own national language. •^ Why
Urdu has not acquired its full status of the national language until now:
(/) It is not so much developed. (/>) The past governments did not do much t introduce it
widely. (/») Foreign cultural influences on us are still strong. Traditions Of the English
language.

3. How Urdu can acquire its full status of the national language. (/) We should develop it
quickly and effectively. (/>) The government should make plans to introduc it in phases
as the medium of instruction at the higher levels and as the officja, language all over the
country, but after serious efforts have begun to bring it in ljne with the developed
languages.

4. The need to have. English as another main language.

5. The Conclusion - National unity and national progress demand that Urdu be given its
rightful place.

Every advanced country has its own national languages. Look at Japan and China East
and West Germany and England, France and Holland, Russia and America. They do not
depend upon borrowed languages for their development. Rather they are developing more
and more because, among other things, they have their own languages.

The question arises: why has Urdu not acquired its full status as the national language of
Pakistan?

Firstly, Urdu is not so much developed. Although several languages Persian, Arabic,
Sanskrit, Turkish, etc. have formed it, it is still not a rich language. It does not have
thousands and thousands of words that are needed in the worlds of business, science,
industry and administration. It is just fairly developed from world standards.

Secondly, the past governments did not do much to introduce Urdu in all the educational
institutions, offices and law courts. They did not help literary organizations suitably in
their research on the Urdu language for making it really advanced. As a result, English
continued to be the more important language for higher education, scientific research,
office work and court proceedings.

Thirdly, English cultural influences on us are still strong. The older generation, especially,
has been under its direct influence.

Now, the second more important question arises: how can Urdu acquire its full status of
the national language?

Firstly, we should add new words to Urdu from the provincial languages and from
foreign languages like English, French, Arabic and Turkish. We can also consider
developing a language from Urdu, Punjabi, Sindhi, Baluchi and Pashto that can easily be
understood everywhere in the country.
Secondly, the government should make plans and take steps to introduce Urdu in phases
as the medium of instruction and as the official language only where it is practicable.
Already some useful work has been done in this connection. Lots more needs to be done.

\\ e shall have to read English as another main language for our progress. Rather than
giving up its study, we should promote it. English is a window- on the world through
which we view and keep in touch with all modern developments in the arts, sciences,
industry, medicine and other fields. English enables us to read original books by world
famous artists, scientists, doctors, engineers and specialists. It helps us to get familiar
with modern research.

National unity and national progress demand that Urdu be given its rightful place
Anyway, before we can do this fully, we have to see whether we have developed 1*

• htly

have also to see whether we are keeping the window on the world, that is,

open.

22. The Place of English in Pakistan (P.U.) The Introduction-International significance

(importance) of the English language,

importance for us.

Importance of English after the Soviet disintegration.

’ usefulness of English: (a) Spoken, read or understand at most places, (b) Language f
science and technology, (c) Language of the social sciences and the arts, (d) I anguage of
modern medicine and surgery, (e) Language of business, commerce and banking- (0
Plenty of religious and spiritual literature in English.
4 The Conclusion-Develop Urdu, but maintain English for quick progress. English may
be a foreign language, but it is international hi its significance (importance). It is rightly
taken as the lingua franca, the common language, for all parts of the world today. There
is every reason to learn and use it all over our country though we also need to develop
and adopt our own national language in all fields of life. The purpose of this essay is to
discuss and explain this very balanced approach to English and Urdu.

To start with the status and importance of the English language. In the late 1980s, the
disintegration (breaking-up) of the Soviet Union started and by 1991 it got divided into
fifteen independent countries most of whom decided to have their own national
languages as their first language. So the Russian language lost its importance as a
superpower language as Russia or the Soviet Union was no more a superpower now. The
United States of America was left as the sole (only) superpower on the world scene
capable of directing world affairs. English being the language of this ”greatest power,” its
importance cannot be disregarded, as the language of the most powerful country is
always supreme.

Let us discuss the usefulness and importance of the English language. Firstly, it is
spoken, read or understood in most parts of the world. Wherever you may go, in Europe,
Asia, Africa or in the Americas, in Australia or the North or South Poles you will find
someone or the other communicating with you in English. What is more useful than this
for a student, politician, trader, tourist or artist?

With a good command of this international language, you can belong to the whole world
as well as to your own country. Rightly, then, as much as deservedly, you can be called a
citizen of the world-a cosmopolitan.

Secondly, English is truly the language of science and technology. All the latest
inventions and developments in science are to be found well-explained into English
books. Libraries and bookshops are full of valuable textbooks and reference books in
English on all the sciences. Then translations of science books in English from other
languages are continuously pouring in and are being made available everywhere. No
other language offers such a wide scope for scientific studies and research as English.
Then why to give up English as an easy and flexible means of learning all that is valuable
in science anywhere? Just consider the field of atomic research, the most vital i°r our
social and economic growth. Without our mastery of English, we could not

avf easily used atomic energy for power generation (production of electricity), in

fngineering projects, medical treatment, etc. All forms of technological developments

”ght and heavy industry, aviation (flying), road, rail and sea communication,
- •’”””:’on

warrare, mountaineering, hunting,.and in all other fields of human endeavour (effort) are
to be found in English.

Thirdly, English offers us treasures of knowledge in all the social sciences \\^ history,
political science, economics, archaeology (the study of the buried remains Of ancient
things), anthropology (the scientific study of the human race), sociology philosophy and
psychology and all the fine arts like music, painting and architecture All sorts of books,
and now videocassettes, computer disks and movie films are available in English on all
forms of intellectual, social and artistic activities.

Fourthly, modern medicine and surgery, developed from worldwide studies and
researches in different countries and languages, now make a tremendous storehouse of
medical knowledge in English. Originally, written and translated medical and surgical
books and magazines in English are constantly printed around the world readily available
to every country. It is only English, in this sense, that has promoted and enriched medical
and surgical studies contributing a lot to the health and longevity of the Modern man.

Fifthly, English is truly a language of business, commerce and banking. It is possible for
anyone in any country or comer of the world to correspond and trade internationally in
English. If perchance (by chance) English is not understood in a particular country,
translators, interpreters or helpers can mostly be found to make English writings
understandable. Most world trade is conducted in English, and a good knowledge of it
puts one to a great advantage.

Lastly, religious and spiritual writings and translations in English are in plenty. All the
holy books including the Holy Quran and the Bible with diverse translations and
commentaries find their pride of place in the section of religious books in any good
library or book gallery. All religions, Hinduism, Zoroastrianism (ancient Persian
religion), Buddhism, Christianity, Islam, and the rest, have all their literature well
presented in English books. It is an incomparable pleasure to read well documented
(supplied with proofs and original documents) and illustrated (explained with examples,
pictures^ etc.) histories of religions in English.

English, then, enshrines (keeps in it) the best of what has been thought and written in the
world, the best of the sweetness and light of knowledge. Just as all positive knowledge is
power. English is power today. *

Considering the importance and usefulness of English in our personal and national life, it
will be suicidal to make it an optional subject or lay less stress on it in our education
system. Rather its studies should be regularized and promoted at all levels throughout the
country.

Urdu no doubt should be developed through constant research. Words and expressions
from our provincial languages can be added to Urdu with the aim of developing a
composite (made of different parts), comprehensive and complete language for the whole
country. Other languages like English, French, Farsi, Hindi and Arabic can also further be
used for the expansion of Urdu vocabulary (total number of words). Translation of books
from different languages and different subjects into Urdu should be quickened
(accelerated).

English, the window on the world, should remain our main language to move alongside
the advanced countries. Urdu should be in an advanced position before we can decide to
use it in place of English, and that in some fields at best.

UJriting

169

(C) Science: its Uses and Progress of Mankind

23. The Place of Science in the Modern World (or) Science-its Uses and Abuses
(Pun., Mul.) The Introduction-Our world is scientific. ’ Beneficial Uses of Science:

’ ccjence and useful inventions. (//) Science and medicine. (Hi) Science and riculture.
(/V) Science and things of daily use. (v) Science and space travel.
4 Harmful Uses of Science:

Science and the making of harmful drugs. (/>) Science and preparations for war. / Science
teaches us to work without prejudice (without favouring or disfavouring

anyone).

7 The Conclusion.

Ours is a scientific world. We depend on (cannot do without) science in a great many

ways. We know that science is necessary for the progress of any country.

Scientists have made use of science for the benefit of man and society. They have used
scientific principles, laws and facts to invent and develop machines of different kinds. For
example, the motor-car, aeroplane and railway engine, printing machines, tube-well
engines, different kinds of machines used in factories producing things of daily use like
match-boxes, cloth, paper, shoes, and so on have been invented by scientists. The radio,
television, VCR, the telephone, the calculator and computer are among the many modern
electronic inventions that have made our life Modern.

Scientists and doctors have invented and developed medicines that can cure speedily
dangerous diseases like typhoid, cholera and tuberculosis. Now human beings can live
much longer than in older times. Even animals and birds get the finest medical treatment
in Modern hospitals where effective medicines and suitable facilities are all the time
available.
The technological advances of modern science have revolutionized our life patterns. The
electronics industry, started in the early 20th century, has reached unimaginable heights
of development. Electronics, besides developing the computer, has caused the perfection
of new communications devices that include the radio, television and laser. Laser
technology is based on the control of beams of light for special purposes. Thus, lasers are
used in industry for cutting and boring metals and other materials. In medicine, they are
used in surgical operations. The use of laser beams in sound transmission is becoming
common.

Science has transformed transportation magically as now the supersonic jet can take man
to the farthest end of the world in hours, and the rocket can take him to the moon and
even beyond. The fast-moving submarine can pierce through the seawater under the
surface to long distances, with the help of the radar, for scientific and business Purposes.

Scientists are now working to control the environment by or causing rainfall and shifting
hurricanes (violent wind-storms) from one place to another. New sources of energy are
being developed to check the fast depletion (using up) of regular fuels like °n and gas. In
this connection, the use of atomic energy for the generation of e ectricity and working of
ship and plane engines is notable.

Scientists have also put science to harmful or destructive uses. For example, they

ave Prepared harmful drugs and intoxicants and weapons of war.

Scientists and experts have invented and developed all kinds of small and big arms and
weapons like the rifle, machines gun, the tank and the missile. They have prepared
bomber and fighter planes, warships and submarines. They have prepared bombs giving
out poisonous gases and setting huge areas on fire. Then they have made the atomic,
hydrogen, cobalt, nitrogen and neutron bombs which can destroy whole cities, countries
and civilizations in minutes. The large-scale killing and destruction caused by the atom
bombs dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki in Japan during the Second World War is a
constant warning to the world.

In fact, science teaches us to work without prejudice. Scientists in all countries use the
same scientific formulas, laws and results. They should, therefore, work together for the
advancement of humankind. They should not, in any case, prepare weapons of mass
destruction. Science is supreme knowledge, and it should be used for the supreme good
of all human beings.

We come to the conclusion that science should be used only for the benefit of human
beings. Scientists should work for peaceful progress. To .make this possible, all countries
should try the settle their disputes through international agencies like the UNO and
decide to give up war.

24. The Use of the Atom (or) Peaceful (and other) Uses of Atomic Energy (P.U.)

1. The Introduction-What is the atom and what is nuclear energy?

2. Nuclear energy was first of all used for destructive purposes-development of the
atomic, hydrogen and other bombs.

3. Atomic energy has been and can be used for peaceful, constructive purposes.
Examples: used in the production of electric power; as fuel for ships and aeroplanes; for
boiling water, and so on.

4. Scientists should make use of atomic energy for peaceful purposes alone. Need for
having nuclear energy societies for its better use.

5. The Conclusion-We should make the best use of atomic energy.

The atom is the smallest particle of matter. It is made up of still smaller particles called
electrons (negatively charged), protons (positively charged) and neutrons (with no
charge). The main part of the atom lies at its centre and is called the nucleus. It consists
of protons and neutrons. When the nucleus is broken up energy is produced This breaking
up of a heavy nucleus into parts with the release of energy is called nuclear fission.
Atomic energy means the tremendous (very great) energy released from the atomic
nucleus.

Radioactive elements like uranium having a large number of protons and giving out
radiations are commonly used for producing nuclear energy. The nuclei of these elements
are bombarded with high-speed particles resulting in atomic fission. Thus, a small
amount of radioactive substance is converted (changed) into a tremendous amount of
nuclear energy.

Scientists first of all made up of atomic energy for destructive purposes. They developed
the atomic bomb, and then the hydrogen and cobalt bombs which can destroy whole
cities and can kill millions of people. The explosions of these bombs result in
radioactivity which poisons the atmosphere over large areas. These bombs go on
releasing highly dangerous radiations as chain reactions inside them between exploding
nuclei continue to take place. Two atomic bombs were dropped on Japan by America
during the Second World War killing thousands and destroying vast areas of

gssov Writing

land. Now all the five big powers, and some other countries besides, possess much more
danger°us atomic and hydrogen bombs. There is the danger that all our Modern

jyjlization and most human beings may get destroyed if there is an atomic or nuclear
World War.

Atomic or nuclear eneVgy can be of great benefit if it is used for peaceful purposes
alone. Scientists have started using it for the good of society. At present electric power is
produced from the atom in the advanced countries. Other countries are also making
efforts to produce electricity at cheap rates from atomic power plants. We have such a
plant in Karachi and may have more at other places. Small amounts of radioactive
materials are used in these plants to produce electricity on a very large scale.

Scientists are also trying to find ways of using atomic power as fuel for ships, aeroplanes,
motorcars, and so on. They think most of the oil and coal may finish in 100 years. In their
place, uranium and thorium can be used. At present atomic reactors for boiling water are
in use in various countries. Huge quantities of water can be boiled quickly and at low
costs for industrial and other purposes.

The radiations given out by atomic reactors are sometimes used for the treatment of
diseases like cancer. These radiations are also used to kill dangerous germs and insects in
foods and cultivated fields.

All countries should enter into agreements for the use of nuclear power for peaceful
purposes alone. The United Nations Organization can make greater efforts to bring
countries to enter into such agreements. There can be nuclear energy societies or
organizations in different parts of the world. Nuclear scientists can become members of
these societies to work together for peaceful uses of atomic energy.

We should make the best use of atomic energy for the benefit of all human beings.
25. Atomic or Nuclear War

Radio-active-<of such metals as radium or uranium) having atoms that break up, and in
so doing, send out rays in the form of electrically charged particles capable of penetrating
(going deep into) opaque (not allowing light to pass through) bodies and of producing
electrical effects.

Radio-active dust-( for example, as carried by winds) from explosion of nuclear bombs,
etc.

Fission-splitting or division (for example, of one cell into new cells, of the nucleus or
central parts of certain atoms, for example, uranium when an atom bomb is exploded.)
1- The Introduction-The development and uses of atomic or nuclear energy in the
twentieth century.

2. The destructive results of an atomic war.

3. Possibilities of atomic or nuclear war in the twenty-first century.

4. The Conclusion. The urgent need to divert nuclear energy into constructive channels.
The twentieth century has witnessed the development and use of atomic or nuclear

energy for destructive and peaceful purposes on a vast scale. Now, when we are afraid °f
atomic wars which can cause unthinkable destruction, we feel the satisfaction of etljoying
comforts given by cheap electricity by nuclear reactors and ships run on atomic energy,
and many more besides. It is surely the destructive use of atomic energy in the production
of weapons of mass destruction like the atomic and hydrogen
172

B.R. english Simple Grammar 61 Composition

bombs that dominates the world scene today. The peaceful uses of atomic energy as we
know and hear about are not many and are, more or less, at the research level.

When the nucleus (central part) of the atom is broken up, tremendous energy is produced.
Radioactive elements like uranium have a large number of protons, and they give out
radiations (energy in rays, energy or heat waves). These elements are used for producing
nuclear energy. The nuclei of these elements are bombarded with highspeed particles,
and this results in nuclear fission (splitting or division). This conversion of a small
amount of radioactive substance into a very great amount of nuclear energy is the basis of
the explosion of an atomic bomb. This explosion produces intense shock waves and
radiations highly damaging to living beings. The surrounding areas to long distances
become contaminated (poisoned) with radio-active fission products. Some radioactive
products are borne (carried) into the upper atmosphere as dust or gas and get deposited
far from the site of the nuclear explosion or radioactive fallout. There are chain reactions
within the mass of the fissionable material and there is an uncontrollable continuous
release of energy causing widespread devastation (ruination).

So, when the first atom bomb was dropped by the US on Hiroshima in Japan in 1945,
3 square miles of the city were destroyed and 160 thousand people were killed. The
second atom bomb dropped by America on Nagasaki in Japan caused even greater
destruction. The sky changed from blue to black and black rain began to fall. The walls of
the buildings turned into rubble (broken stone and bricks) to miles around the point of
explosion. The air was full of radiations. There was no question of breathing at ease, so
thousands of human beings animals and all other living creatures died instantly. The
clothes of the people were in rags and their skin hung from their bodies. The dead and
those living in death looked like ghosts (spirits). The trees lost their leaves altogether and
the water got contaminated. Those who survived (continued to live after) the atomic
explosion suffered from killing diseases like cancer and leukaemia (loss of red

blood cells).

The horrors of the hydrogen bomb explosion are even more frightening. It is a
thermonuclear bomb, ”thermo” meaning ”of heat.” At its centre is no doubt an atomic
bomb which is exploded at the start. This explosion activates the surrounding hydrogen
radioactive atoms. An extremely hot zone is created in which nearly all of the matter
present Burns or changes into vapour or gas at extremely high pressure. The shock
waves, then, travelling from the bomb cause destruction in the air, under water, or
underground. The fireball resulting from the hydrogen bomb explosion is five times
hotter than the centre of the1 sun. It is said that there are explosions in the hydrogen
bomb with the release of tremendous heat as there are explosions in the sun.

From what has been said above, in addition to the atomic or nuclear radiations given out
by the hydrogen bomb its burning and melting effects are simply indescribable. Further
developments of the hydrogen bomb lead us to the neutron and cobalt bombs based on
the same radioactive principles.

Now, besides the modern aircraft, short and long-range missiles are in possession of
nucjf”- states. Missiles can easily be equipped with atomic warheads. The missiles are ^n
enemy territory with their payloads (warheads of missiles). It is not possible •>mplete
defences against nuclear explosions except to have anti-missile and systems to stop the
arrival of the nuclear bombs. Unluckily so many MIS are available with the nuclear
powers that their use can destroy our

173

essay Writing

world several times over. The most painful aspect (facet) of a nuclear war is that its
destruction does not remain confined (restricted) to the time during which it continues.
After the nuclear explosions the particles, radioactive substances in the air go on emitting
(giving out) radiations for weeks together. When these parties are carried far by blowing
winds, the radiations spread to areas which are not even engaged in war.

No country can win a large-scale nuclear use with another nuclear power as both will get
destroyed in the process. Besides, the countries affected by the radioactive fallout, even
not participating (taking part) in the war will suffer unnecessary destruction. A nuclear
war in effect (as a result) will take away human, animal and food resources from the
people of the world in large areas and for a very long time. It will cause untold
(immeasurable) suffering, uncontrollable disease, unbearable hunger and largescale
death.

Surely it is in the interest of all humanity to bring all nuclear preparations to an end and
to destroy the stockpiles of nuclear weapons everywhere through mutual agreement
(consent). The tremendous efforts and huge amounts of money now being spent an
nuclear was preparations can well be used for peaceful uses of nuclear energy. The need
to have a worldwide agreement on banning the preparation and use of nuclear weapons is
the need of the hour.

26. Uses of Solar Energy (or) The Sun as a Source of Energy

1. The Introduction-What makes solar energy useful.

2. Use of solar energy in olden and modern times.

3. Solar energy an answer to many of our energy problems.

Solar energy (energy got from the sun) is a very useful form of energy like atomic and
wind energy. The problems of rising costs of fuels like oil and gas and the pollution
(dirtiness of the atmosphere) caused by them have made scientists work on solar energy
for man’s future use. About half of the solar energy is light, about half is infrared
radiation (heat, energy, etc. in rays) and very little ultraviolet radiation.

In olden times, in China, Egypt, the Middle East, Greece and Italy solar energy was used
to evaporate salt water (change it into vapour) to get salt. Crop drying through solar heat
was also common. In the 19th century, it was used for preparing wine in Chile (South
America). In the early 20th century, it was used in Egypt to run an engine for pumping
irrigation water from the Nile.

In modern times, the first main use of solar energy is to change it into thermal energy (of
heat as that of coal or gas). Solar rays hit a flat plate collector which absorbs a lot of heat.
This flat plate collector is then used for water heating, house heating, airconditioning and
for getting salt from salt water and pure drinking water from sea water. Solar water-
heaters are in use in Australia, Japan and America. In airconditioning the flat-plate
collector supplies heat to operate an air-conditioner. In solar evaporation, saltish water is
made to evaporate from ponds, and thus salt is got. In solar distillation, pure water vapour
is collected in storage tanks.

Secondly, scientists are trying to convert (change) solar energy to electric energy through
solar cells. A solar cell is an invention (device) that directly changes solar radiation to
electric energy. Spaceships get their electric power through solar cells. Further, they are
being used to provide power to radios, telephones, and other wireless equipment.
Lighthouses at sea get their power supplies from them. At present, the cost °f producing
electricity from solar cells is very high.
Thirdly, heat engines are being used to convert solar energy to mechanical energy. This
mechanical energy is used directly or again converted to electric energy for operating
machines. Heat collectors are used to heat fluids whose steam passes through engines
where it is converted to mechanical energy.

Fourthly, we can use the solar energy or heat stored in the sea. Most of the solar energy
that comes to the world is taken by the sea. The water at the surface of the sea is warmer
than at the depth. Heat flows from the area of higher temperature to that of a lower one.
So if we make this heat of the warm water flow through a heat engine, the heat energy
can be converted to mechanical or electric energy. Power plants can thus use thermal
energy especially in warm waters.

Fifthly, in Japan and some other countries small plants grow in the sea by absorbing
sunlight. These plants are dried and then used as food.

There have been attempts to make solar cars in Europe and elsewhere. These cars run on
electric energy instead of oil. The car batteries charged with solar energy provide the
electric energy. However, at present the batteries are too heavy and are charged over long
hours.

Solar energy may be the answer to many of our energy problems.

27. The World of Machines (or) Science and Machines.

1. The Introduction-Ours is a machine age.

2. Industrial progress depends on machines.

3. Use of machines in agriculture.

4. Machines and transportation.

5. Machines at home. ,

6. Machines working like us, physically and mentally.

Ours is rightly called the machine age as we are living in the world of machines.
Everywhere and all the time we depend on machines. Most of the things of daily use like
pencils, knives, watches, fans, shoes and cloth are the products of machines. We construct
our houses, enjoy comfortable life at home and move around at ease with the help of
machines. Machines are the result of man’s effort to ”produce more work with less
energy.”

Industrial progress depends on the use of new and more efficient machines that can
produce more and better goods. The ruling industrial powers, that is, Japan, Italy, France,
England, Russia, the US and the rest have made use of modern technology to
computerize (use computers in) the designing and production of machines in great
demand like cars, TVs, refrigerators and various other electric instruments and devices.
Our success as an industrial power will depend a great deal on the use of the latest
electronic, laser and other technologies. The whole defence industry producing war
planes, submarines and light and heavy arms needs an intelligent use of the latest
technologies.

The mechanisation of (using machines in) agriculture is essential to a big increase (rise)
in the production of food grains. We have begun using, on a vast scale, the tractor, mower
(machine for cutting the crops), thresher (machine for beating the grain sut of wheat,
etc.), tube-well engines and some other heavy machines. No doubt, the ase of machinery
on farms makes farm labour surplus (extra). This surplus labour can, lowever, be utilized
in small-scale cottage industries in the villages.

The engines used in our cars, buses, railway engines (locomotives), aeroplanes and ihips
change (transform) energy into power. We are developing more efficient engines

„,_, Writing?

Ow to help us to move at hundreds of kilometres per hour on the ground and to fly
at

ersonic Speecjs (at Speeds faster than the speed of sound). Machines for our vehicles

using nuclear energy in place of oil or gas might bring about a revolution in

transportation.

Different kinds of machines have made our life at home highly comfortable. There are the
gas and electric stove, the cooking-range, the juicer, the electric iron, the cooler and air-
conditioner, the radio, TV, VCR (videocassette recorder), and so on that have made life
really enjoyable.

We have developed machines like the robot that ”move and do some of the work of a
man.” The robot is set to fix parts of machines under production, to operate and control
production processes, to do odd jobs like cleaning the floors, etc. The computer can be
programmed to plan and design buildings and cars, to calculate construction and
operation costs, to further design better computers, and so on. However, with all the work
performed by machines, they cannot entirely replace man. The human brain works
independently and invents or designs various machines according to social

needs.

28. Computers
1. The Introduction-What is a computer?

2. Computers in business and industry.

3. Computers in engineering.

4. Computers in space1 or sea exploration, air travel, rail travel, telecommunications,

medicine, education, typing, music.

5. Computer memory.

6. Computers, in any case, cannot replace human beings.

7. The Conclusion-True^ modernisation is impossible without computers.

A computer is an electronic device that solves problems by processing data according to

instructions. ”Computer” comes from the Latin computer which means to reckon up (= to
calculate or add up). It is interesting to note that the first mechanical digital calculating
machine was built as early as 1642 by the French scientist Blaise Pascal. The first
automatic electronic digital computer was prepared in America in 1946. The modern
computers using stored-programme digital processors were introduced in the
1950s. Two classes of computers have been in use, digital and analog.1

The electronic computer is rightly called wonder (marvel) of the machine age. It can add,
subtract, multiply and divide ”with lightning speed and perfect accuracy.” It can multiply
several ten-digit numbers in 1/1000 second working 500,000 times faster than

a human being. We give a programme to a computer to work for us in any field-business,

industry,

construction, banking, medicine, teaching, and so on.

In business and industry, the computer prepares and keeps lists of goods, correspondence
records and sales and profit and loss accounts. It can inform us of the production needs
and the best production processes for a certain factory. It can compare several industrial
processes of production and let us decide about the best ones. Thus, in the shortest time
we can have the details of working of hundreds of factories on the computer screen and
have the results of their production sitting

comfortably in a room of our choice.

A computer can solve all kinds of engineering problems of building, those of designing
various building structures, finding the most accurate ana effective material
mixtures and safety measures for earthquake proof and sound-proof rooms. T}^ computer
accuracy has reduced building time, has helped us to save money and to construct perfect
structures of so many kinds that one mind or a few minds can never think of
(contemplate).

In space or sea exploration, the computer is extremely useful. It collects information from
outer space regarding distances, various heavenly bodies in movement, rays and beams in
their effects, the earth’s position and possibilities of man’s travel into space. In the same
way, information from the depths of the ocean is conveyed by sensitive computers
regarding availability of oil, minerals, precious stones, sea and vegetable life, and rocks
and sea beds. So going upward into space and around the earth and downward into the
ocean and sideways in water are facilitated by computers. Rockets satellites and
spaceships are controlled through computers. In air travel

(aviation) computers are used to direct air flights between different cities, to control

the speed and heights (altitudes) of planes and to help in taking off and landing.

Computer training courses of airline pilots and the ground staff at airports are

necessary for smooth operation.

In the same way, the operation of the railways and fast-moving vehicles on the roads is
controlled for safe and accurate travel.

Computers have made possible the smooth working of the telecommunications systems,
that is, the process of receiving or sending messages by telephone, radio, television,
telegraph, or satellites. Millions of telephone lines over the country remain in operation
through computerized telephone exchanges. Radio or wireless, TV and satellite
communication is now extremely fast and complex.

In medicine, computers are being widely used to diagnose or determine diseases, to

prescribe medicines and to perform various tests like blood and heart analysis. They help
maintain records of patients to be made available at a moment’s notice.

In education computers started to be used in the 1960s. Instructional computers are used
in two ways-to provide direct presentation of data (facts) or to act as a teacher to test the
understanding and knowledge of the student. The computer can very systematically
present in different ways, and with a wide variety of examples (illustrations), the
developments in a field of knowledge. It can do what-a whole part of a library can do,
and that too if it is consulted over some years by a number of people, and they make their
own notes. Then the computer gives tests in the form of questions and gets ready
answers. It corrects the answers and then begins asking more difficult questions. In this
way, students can individually and independently study and have themselves tested with
immediate results.
Computers have brought about a revolution in typing. Computer typing is fast, accurate
and beautiful, in several patterns and shapes. In computer typing moving rays of light
from a laser lens are used.

In computer music, the composer programmes the computer to produce different

rhythms, tunes and tones from some sounds stored in it. These sounds are stored on
magnetic tape and can be played back. The computer helps in expanding the range of
tones and tunes.

An electric computer can store in its memory information and facts of all kinds in regular
forms. A small disc or cassette can keep material that several books and many files might
contain. Whole libraries and complete office records can be computerized. In our country
big banks, hospitals, libraries, company and government offices,

I //

educational institutions, military departments, etc. have been or are being

oinputerized. The ID card computerization was necessary in the complex social situation.

With all this computer progress, we can say that computers cannot replace us. Our brain
has more than 10 billion cells whereas a computer has only a few hundred thoUSnd parts.
While we can thinlc and imagine independently, a computer cannot.

perhaps the advantages of using computers outweigh the disadvantages. Computers save
our time in solving our technical, social and national problems through their excellent
memory and problem-solving mechanisms. They make teaching easy and promote
independence in students. But computers mechanise our life rather too much. ^re begin
using our minds less and computers more, thus affecting adversely (badly) our linking
and intelligence. Though we spend huge amounts of money on education computer
programme teaching becomes a dull affair without the interesting questionanswer free
classroom atmosphere.

Computers have taken the economies of the U.S.A., Canada, most European countries,
Japan., China and South Korea to great heights. We cannot have scientific industrial,
technological and social progress of the highest order without a free and wide use of
computers. Computerization and modernization now go together.

1. hi digital computation measurement of the digits is undertaken by counting. In the

analogy computation, we solve the problem by using the knowledge that is relevant to a
physical situation that can be built.

2. For instance (example), in America an electrical beam named Cheops (Chemical

Engineering Optimising System) was fed information for designing a chemical plant.
After examining 16,000 designs it selected the best one and provided it in exact
proportions. Engineers had failed to produce a design as perfect as this one after years of
efforts.

29. Space Travel or Exploration

1. The Introduction-Space travel to the moon. How it became possible.

2. Difficulties and dangers of space travel.

3. Contact between spacemen and control stations on earth.

4. Benefits of space travel.

5. The Conclusion-Space travel should be for peaceful purposes.

Space travel or journey to the moon is no more a dream. It is possible for man to travel
into outer space in a spaceship over thousands of miles. It is now possible for him to
travel to the moon. Space travel became possible when the Russians started sending
artificial satellites into outer space in 1957. These satellites travelled around the earth
hundreds of miles about it. Afterwards the Americans sent their satellites into ouster
space and reached the moon in 1969.

Spacemen or astronauts have to face difficulties and dangers. For example, they have to
breathe oxygen as there is no air in outer space. They have to face the problem of
Sightlessness in space when they are out of the gravitational pull of the earth. They are
trained well to face it. Extremely dangerous rays like ”cosmic rays” and ”solar rays” all
the time attack the spaceship.

Spacemen go on talking to control stations on earth (on wireless) during space travel.
xPerts in these control stations advise the, spacemen about their direction in space, sPeed
of their ship, and so on.
u.n. ciiyuaii j”ii(jiB vjrammor bi Composition

Space travel is of great benefit. It has made visits to the moon possible. It may make it
possible for man to travel to other planets like Mars. Spacemen collect a lot of useful
information about space while travelling through it. They have special instruments on
their spaceship to record facts about the different kinds of rays or radiations, electric
charges, etc. present in space. These instruments also give useful information about the
atmospheric pressure, pressure of the magnetic field of the earth when the spaceship is
closer to the earth. They also tell about the presence of minerals and oil on the earth etc
and in the sea.

Space travel should be for peaceful purposes alone. Spaceships or artificial satellites
should never be equipped with weapons of war. All countries should work together in the
field of space travel for the benefit of humankind.

30. The Scientist’s Dream World of the Future (or) The World in the Next Centuries

1. The Introduction-We cannot say exactly what the world would be like in the next
century or in the distant future.

2. There will be machines doing more work than our machines and producing more goods
of daily use.

3. Farming will be almost completely mechanized in most countries. Much increase in

food production.

4. Foods in the form of pills will be available.

5. Underground cities in the next centuries for the growing populations. Housing colonies
on other planets and in the outer space.

6. Travelling will be much faster and easier than at present.

7. Atomic and solar (the sun’s) energy will be in use in place of oil, coal, gas, etc.)

8. Visits to other planets will be quite common.

9. All diseases will be easily cured.

10. The Conclusion-We should learn to live in peace to make the above scientific
progress possible.

It cannot be said exactly what the world would be like in the next centuries. However, we
may have some thoughts on it.

The world in the next century will be much more advanced than ours. Machines will be
more perfect performing work many times more than our machines. As a result, the
production of things of daily use like pens, watches, radios, TVs, calculators, etc, will
increase (rise) tremendously. People will be able to buy them at cheap rates. As machines
will be more automatic and faster in operation, factory workers will work less and have
more holidays and free time. More efficient machines will, at the same time, create
problems of unemployment.

Farming will be almost completely mechanized in most countries. More efficient farm
machines like tractors, threshers (machines separating the grain from wheat, corn etc.)
and harvesters and new machines not available now will be in common use. New kinds of
fertilizers (chemical substances for growing crops better) and salts and insecticides
(chemical substances for killing insects) will make the farms highly productive. There
will be food surpluses in several parts o,f the world.

There is also the possibility of developing foods in the form of pills. One pill may be
enough for a day’s meals for a person. These pills will solve the food problems in the
countries where there is serious food shortage.

ssov Writing

179

In some countries, the cities and villages on the surface of the earth may not be enough
for the increased populations. So engineers will make it possible to have underground
cities. These cities will get air from the earth’s atmosphere or scientists will set up
chemical plants producing oxygen or air all the time.

Scientists will succeed in setting up housing colonies on other-planets like the moon.
Mars, Venus or Jupiter. They will find ways of producing oxygen and food for human life
to continue there. Then they will have huge space stations with thousands of houses in
each. These stations will hang in outer space or will be moving round the earth.

Travelling will be extremely fast and easy in the next century. Supersonic (faster than the
speed of sound) and double-decker aeroplanes will be in common use. It will be a matter
of minutes to reach a place thousands of miles away. Railway trains may have speeds of
hundreds of miles per hour. Flying cars may also be in use for travelling over shorter
distances. Nuclear powered ships at sea will be moving at much faster speeds.

It may be possible in the next century to use atomic and solar energy in place of oil, coal,
gas, etc. on a very large scale. Electricity for the use of the public or for industrial use
will be produced at all places with atomic energy at extremely low costs. Aeroplanes,
cars, railway trains and ships will be run on atomic energy.

Travelling to the moon or to other planets like Mars, Jupiter, Venus, etc. may become
quite common in the next century. Common people may often be visiting other planets in
spaceships. Space accidents may also be happening. It may also be possible to establish
housing colonies on the moon or other planets.

New medicines to cure all kinds of dangerous diseases in a quick way may be invented.
Some diseases like blood pressure and cancer which are at present quite incurable will be
easily curable. This will bring down the death rate. Human beings will be able to live
much longer. Then new kinds of surgical operations may make it possible to correct all
kinds of defects of the body.

Computers will be in more common use doing, much of the thinking and planning that
businessmen, architects, engineers, doctors and technicians have to do. As ”thinking
machines,” computers will be working in place of human brains in many ways.

Yet all the above scientific progress is possible if all countries learn to live in peace. They
should use science for peaceful purposes and for the progress of mankind.

(D) War, Peace & The UNO ! , ”’

31. War or Peace: Which is Better

(or) War is a Necessary Evil

1- The Introduction-War has been there for thousands of years.

2. Causes of wars:

(0 For the sake of ”expansion” of territory, (ii) To get back territories from foreign rulers
or invaders, (in) Religious causes, (iv) Border disputes or causes, (v) Other

causes such as competition between countries to get control of foreign markets, and so
on.

• War may be a necessary evil as the only practical means (way) of settling disputes and
differences.

• Countries can agree to get their disputes settled by the UNO (United Nations
Ur§anization) in peaceful ways.
5. The UNO should be made the most powerful body in the world to be able to stop one
country from attacking another and to make countries obey its decisions.

6. Peace is better than war. Smaller countries, like the big powers, should settle their
disputes by peaceful means.

7. The Conclusion-All countries should begin acting upon the principles of justice and
equality.

War and fighting have been common since time immemorial (going beyond the reach of
memory) there since humans being started living in tribes thousands of years ago As
human beings lived in better societies, they improved their methods of fighting.

Countries or nations fight wars for a number of reasons. Firstly, two or more countries or
nations may begin a war for the sake of ”expansion” of territory. This is called an
”expansionist war.” One country makes some claims on the territory of another. After
increasing its military power it attacks the other country. Germany started the war against
Poland in 1939 just to expand its territory which developed into the Second World War.

Secondly, wars are fought by nations to get back* (recover) their countries from I foreign
rulers or invaders (attackers). Such wars are fought for the sake of national I
independence. These national wars of liberation are the result of national liberation
movements. Thus, the Indian Muslims fought the War of Independence against the
English in 1857. The Chinese fought a war of liberation against foreign armies before
becoming independent in 1949. The Afghans started their freedom struggle against the
Russians in 1979.

Thirdly, wars may be fought for religious reasons. Such wars were very common in olden
times. For example, many religious wars were fought between Christians and Muslims
hundreds of years ago in Asia and Europe. In our times, wars between the Arabs and Jews
in the Middle’East have religious causes.

Wars may also be the result of border disputes between countries. Countries may fail to
adjust their borders through discussions and may go to war. Thus, China and India fought
a war in 1962, and Iraq and Iran started fighting in 1980. There may be other causes of
wars such as competition between two or more countries to win control of important parts
of the seas or to capture foreign markets for the export of goods.

When we consider the causes of war, we begin thinking that it is a necessary evil. .
Countries will continue to have disputes and differences. They will have to fight wars to
settle them if they cannot do so through discussions and conferences. Stronger countries
have often imposed their decision on weaker countries.

Yet, war may not be the only way of settling disputes. If all countries agree to accept the
decisions of the UNO in their disputes; war can be avoided. However, for this, all
countries should be given equal importance in the UNO. The big powers should not have
the right of rejecting its decisions. They should not be in possession of the highly
destructive atomic weapons.

Peace is generally better than war. Wars fought by some powerful countries to dominate
(establish control over) weaker nations should be condemned. Only those wars can be
justified which are defensive or which are fought against foreign armies occupying a
country.

The big powers like America, Russia and China have started settling their dispute*
through discussions and conferences. Smaller countries should also decide to resolve
their differences in peaceful ways.

I , aM”d war ’m a complete way flH countries or nations should begin acting upon the
nrinciples of justice and equality. P - 32. Is the UN a Failure or a Success?

The Introduction-The two main aims of the UN-to prevent war and to improve ^better)
the condition of all human beings. T The two main parts of the UN-the General
Assembly and the Security Council.

The help that the UN gives to the member countries to solve their social, educational,
scientific and other problems. . Regular wars. Successes in arresting their escalation
(spread).

’ -pjjg UN can at least discuss wars and pass resolutions.

6 How to make the UN really powerful.

The United Nations Organization (UN) came into existence in 1945. It was soon after the
Second World War that different nations formed it for the good of the world. It was
organized to prevent war and to improve the condition of all human beings.

The UN consists (is made up) of two main parts, the General Assembly and the Security
Council. Every member nation of the UN sends five representatives to the General
Assembly. The General Assembly discusses and considers problems of war, disputes
between countries, ways of helping backward or poorer countries, and so on. It passes
resolutions and makes decisions after a great deal of discussion. However, it does not
have the power to implement them (put them into effect).

The Security Council consists of fifteen members. Five members are permanent. These
are the most powerful countries, that is, the U.S.A., Russia, the People’s Republic of
China, France and Britain. The Security Council discusses urgent problems of war or
serious political disputes. It passes resolutions on these problems. It has the power to
implement them. However, each of its permanent members has the right of rejecting or of
’Vetoing” its decisions.

The UN has very well helped its member countries in handling some of their social
educational, scientific and other problems. It works through its own and other specialized
agencies for the betterment of the world. For example, the International Labour
Organization (ILO) helps solve the problems of labourers and working people all over the
world. The World Health Organization (WHO) works on health and the removal of
diseases. The United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization
(UNESCO) helps in improving education, agriculture and health.

Despite the UN regular wars have taken place between India and Pakistan, Israel and the

”s’ Ethiopia and Somalia, Iran and Iraq, and so on. At times, however, it helped to

ease a war situation and to arrest the spread (escalation) of a war. Thus, it helped in
ending

e Korean war, in preventing a war between America and Russia over Cuba in the

SlXtl?f’,^the s’Sning of tne Afghanistan peace accord (”a landmark in peace negotiations

r a|ks’) and in arranging a cease-fire between the warring Iran and Iraq in 1988.

mvera”’tne UN has failed to prevent or stop wars. The UN General Assembly, where

irn 1 *e count”es are represented, is quite powerless. Its decisions cannot be

P eniented by force. The Security Council is not free \o act. Any of its five permanent

m ””•> can reject or ’Veto” its resolutions.

n case of an attack or aggression by one country against another the Generall lt the - -d
the Security Council can at least discuss it well. Through its resolutions on| eneral
Assembly can showwhat world public opinion wants in the matter.
The UN cannot become truly powerful unless all the big powers agree to destroy their
atomic weapons and decide not to make any more. The UN should be having its own
armed forces, more powerful than those of any one single country. After this none of the
five big powers should any more have the right to reject the decisions of the Security
Council. The decisions of the General Assembly should also be implemented by force.
But the UN should at the same time be completely impartial (not with any side) in giving
its decisions on disputes between countries.

33. Compulsory Military Training (or) National Service

1. The Introduction-Compulsory military training or national service becomes

necessary in times of emergency.

2. Compulsory military training is often given to healthy and sensible persons between
-

definite ages.

3 . Arrangements for military training under our new education system.

4. There can be military centres in villages, towns and cities for the military training of
farmers, labourers and workers of different kinds.

5. Education is necessary for good military training.

1 . Benefits of military training.

Compulsory military training or national service often becomes necessary in times of

emergency. Compulsory military training is given to healthy boys or men between

definite ages.

When there is a war or a great danger of war, the government can order able-bodied men
to obtain military training. These men get away from their regular work or activity for a
few weeks or months to have military training. Their courses of training can be repeated
from time to time. All of them are in the national service of their country.

There can be proper arrangements for military training in our educational institutions.
The students, both male and female, can be trained in the use of small arms. Those who
are fit enough to join the army can be given a chance. The NCC in our colleges has done

quite well.

Military centres in villages, towns and cities can give military {raining to farmers,
labourers and workers of different kinds. Firstly, a proper selection of healthy and
sensible men should be made. Then these selected men may be given the training at
military centres for definite periods. Those able to read and write can be trained in the use
of heavy or complicated (complex) weapons.

For proper military training, we should educate as many people as possible. Most of our
young men in villages and many in cities are uneducated. They cannot easily understand
the art of fighting and the use of modern weapons during their military training. So,
universal (for all) and adult (for the grown-ups) education should be introduced side by

side.

Compulsory military trainmg or national service is very important and useful for a poor
developing country like ours. Such a country cannot afford (cannot have the means) to
keep a huge, regular army during times of peace. Civilians getting compulsory military
training can become a reserve military force for the country.

Compulsory military training gives a chance to civilians to fight against the enemy within
(inside) the country. Those trained thus can fight against and kill the enemy s

Cssov Writing 183

soldiers dropped by its warplanes (called paratroopers). They can kill the enemy’s agents
or spies (secret agents). They can fire anti-aircraft guns at the enemy’s planes. The\ can
defend bridges, roads, railway stations, airports or other important central places .igjmst
sudden attacks of the enemy.

Military training of the people on a large scale will make them disciplined. It will make
them active and quick in the defence of their country. It will increase (promote) their love
for their nation and country. Those who are unemployed may be paid some regular
allowances or stipends during their training and after it. Some of them may find it
possible to join the army as regular soldiers.

34. The CTBT

Very much talked about in our country as well as in others is the Comprehensive Nuclear
Test-Ban Treaty (CTBT), an agreement between states to prevent the nuclear powers
from developing more advanced and dangerous weapons. As long ago as 1946 the United
Nations set up an Atomic Energy Commission to make proposals for the peaceful uses of
atomic energy and for a ban on atomic weapons. It was after the world had witnessed in
1945 the horrible results of the dropping of two atom bombs on Japan by the US that
several Disarmament groups in the advanced countries and in the UNO started working
for a ban on nuclear weapons worldwide. In 1963 America, Britain and the Soviet Union
could not reach an agreement on a comprehensive nuclear test ban treaty (wide
agreement). They disagreed on on-site inspection. However, they concluded a limited (or
partial) Test-Ban Treaty (LTBT) prohibiting tests in the atmosphere, outer space and
beneath the surface of the sea. In 1988 six non-aligned states asked for amendment in the
1963 LTBT to make it comprehensive (allinclusive) to disallow further regular nuclear
tests or explosions and to open up the nuclear weapons sites to international inspection.
Later, the five declared nuclear powers opposed this move. In 1998, after nuclear test
explosions by India and Pakistan, the importance of concluding a CTBT between all
nuclear states gained ground. However, in 1999 the US Senate rejected the approval
(ratification) of the CTBT.

The FMCT-the Fissile Material (in which the atomic nucleus is split releasing tremendous
amounts of energy) Cut-Off Treaty-is being discussed in Geneva. Pakistan is included in
the discussion. The purpose of this Treaty is to restrict the possession of fissile material,
but it is unfair to place restrictions on new states that do not possess enough nuclear
defence capability although they are nuclear or atomic powers. The signing of the FMCT
can be even more disadvantageous than the signing of the CTBT.

The need for signing the CTBT by all the nuclear states simultaneously (at the same ”me)
is paramount because of the increase of more and more powerful nuclear bombs and
weapons in their possession. It is clear to all now that if only a few of the nuclear

ates sign this treaty, the non-signatories will go on testing newer weapons. In our context,
its signing by India and Pakistan, together with all the other declared and undeclared
nuclear states, is essential.

The need to destroy all existing nuclear arsenals (huge stores) in the possession of all ^
nuclear powers, together with their signing of the CTBT, is also essential. It is so

ecause, at least, the major nuclear powers, that is, US, Britain, Russia, France and ma
have hundreds of nuclear weapons that can destroy all the world several times

er one complete destruction. So, what is the use of banning further tests alone when
the world powers continue to hold weapons of total destruction? However, the CTBT, in
any case, can stop or prevent non-nuclear states from entering the nuclear club.

A group of scientists and social thinkers in Pakistan, including Dr. Abdul Qadeer Khan,
supports the signing of the CTBT. It argues that even after signing the treaty

Pakistan can still engage in those nuclear tests that are not specified (named) in the

treaty document, for example, computer-controlled test, ”sub-critical test,” etc. Then any
country that is a party to the treaty can withdraw from it if it finds that it can no longer
stay in it. This can happen, for example, when it faces some unusual dangers of attack
from powerful neighbours.

Whatever the arguments against or in favour of signing the CTBT, the fact remains that
the five major nuclear powers, together with India. Pakistan, Israel any the other
44 nuclear-capable states, have the means of total destruction in their hands. It is high
time the causes of this destruction were removed. The world will have to find ways of
solving the most serious problems like Kashmir for the sake of a just nuclear settlement.

(£) Economic, Political & Social Topics

35. Information Technology (IT)

1. The Introduction. What is information technology? The age of science and

technology.

2. Software and hardware industry.

2. The importance of information technology, its uses.

3. The best ways of promoting information technology in the country.

4. How we can make provide jobs and employment to graduates and experts in
information technology.

5. The Conclusion. Information technology and the future of the world.

In a common way, we may define technology as the best ways and methods of running
our machines and commerce or the most efficient means of improving our industry and
business. Information technology means much more than this and, in fact, covers all that
life is. It means the best ways or methods of gaining information or knowledge from all
corners and places that can help in promoting our ”work in all fields | of life-science,
industry, commerce, education, engineering, medicine, land, air, I space and sea travel,
war, games, designing, drawing, sewing, cooking, and so on. The ^ gaining and spread
of information from everywhere has been made possible by information technology.

The main tool for the communication and receipt of information in all forms is the
computer. No doubt, the computer is connected to booster stations, satellite systems, and
feeders across the globe through what we call the Internet. When we switch on the
computer, the world of information and knowledge lies open Jo us in all fields of life on
the screen and in the speakers attached to the computer. The different computer
programmes and systems take us to the stores of information thai the computer goes on
recording non-stop. Therefore, the first giant step towards gaining information is to learn
computer operation and programming.

Information technology, as software industry, for operating the data (points of

knowledge), programmes and systems of the computer came to be,widely used in the last
twenty years (decades) of the twentieth century. Side by side with it, the hardware
industry, for the manufacture of the mechanical and electronic parts of the computer,
grew speedily as the use of computer software became common. Now, the computer

£ssov Writing

software and hardware industries are expanding profitably in the advanced as well as the
developing countries like Pakistan, India and South Korea. These industries do not eed
very much of capital and investment except for research work of the highest order, expert
knowledge of computer science and the latest techniques and methods of operating and
designing computer programmes and computer components (parts).

Information technology, in the firs! instance (to begin with), brings to us the latest de^
jlopments in science, technology and the arts in the advanced \\orld. We can make use of
the latest techniques and methods in the sciences and the arts within the four corners of
our buildings. Never before in world history did all knowledge lie so much within the
reach of all and sundry (all kinds of people).

Secondly, we can communicate with anyone anywhere in he world and send him
messages in a jiffy (very soon). The e-mail hUs made it possible to send any amount of
information to any place in a few seconds. The receiver of the information can at once
send back the reply or his own information. Talk on programmes like hotmail messenger
or yahoo messenger, along with the display of the talkers on the screen, gives a direct
personal touch to the exchange of information and ideas. The progress from the
impersonal to the personal, thus, makes the computer the most valued product of modern
science and technology-an intimate companion, a sympathetic friend and a wise adviser.
Information technology has, in effect (practically), reduced distance completely between
parties sitting in continents separated by the high seas and immeasurable skies.

Thirdly, computer technology can help us to bring about social, political and economic
revolution in the country. We can make a complete study of the different social, political
and economic systems in the most successful countries. We can observe, at first hand,
how these countries are progressing or have progressed to their present state (condition).
The past, present and possible future of these countries and societies can be studied
through computer records, films and programmes. The whole histories of these countries
and the present developments can be summarized or condensed and projected on the
screen for ready reference and use. In the background of this computer study, rapid
changes can be brought about if we are willing and ready. For instance (example), a study
of the developments in the People’s Republic of China, South Korea and Japan can be
made by our students, scholars and leaders for urgent political, economic and social
changes that the people are thirsting for and that are needed to save the country from
inaction, backwardness and hopelessness.

Fourthly, computer technology can be used to collect information about the different
classes and groups of the people in the country. A thorough study of their educational,
professional and social needs can lead us to concrete solution of their problems. It is
surprising and shocking that the true needs of the people, in different walks of life, are
not presented to the leaders and policy-makers by putting computer technology to proper
use. As a result (resultantly), firm and suitable policies for the uplift of the masses
(common people) are not framed, and the society does not make balanced progress. The
working of government departments, law courts, firms, companies, educational
institutions, industries, farms, markets, bus companies, railways, airlines, seaports, stock
exchanges and activities like smuggling, black marketing, terrorism and other crimes
should be within the network of the computer. It can be used, surely, to lessen (reduce)
crime and social disorder. It is already in use for the improvement
This capital plus the labour force available in these countries would make possible an
industrial and agricultural revolution never heard of earlier. But, this does not happen.
The capital flows to the multinational companies having their branches in the developing
countries, and this capital is used to purchase raw material at very low prices, to send it to
the developed countries. The developed countries then send back highly expensive
finished goods to these backward countries to enrich themselves even more. The labour
classes in the developing countries are so very ignorant and illiterate, thanks to the cruel
rulers and useless social traditions, that they cannot work on Modern machines to add to
production with the help of foreign capital.

Globalization can work wonders, in the industrial and commercial sense, if the working
classes in the developing countries are educated and trained with foreign capital and with
the money of feudal lords and capitalists inside. Then, the thousands and millions of
labourers, workers and farmers can be invited to the advanced countries to get educated
and to learn modern industrial and agricultural techniques to work in the advanced
countries and to work in their own countries by turn.

Secondly, globalization means free trade or the lifting of restrictions of duties and taxes
on imports and exports. It does not sound sensible on the part of the developed countries
to open the free flow of their perfectly produced goods into the markets of the developing
states where the same goods are either inferior or expensive. This kind of free trade will
result in depressed sale of native goods, closure of factories and unemployment of the
labour class in the less developed countries. The effects of free trade have disturbed the
developed parts of the world as well. That is why large-scale demonstrations against
globalization, the World Bank (the WB) and the International Monetary Fund (the IMF)
have taken place in Thailand, Japan, America, Australia, Czechoslovakia and elsewhere
in
2000. Unfortunately, the WB and IMF have continued to support the cause of free trade at
the cost of the economies of the Third World (that is, underdeveloped countries) and, in
some areas, at the cost of the developed countries.

In fact, the time is not ripe for making free trade internationally operative. This can
happen, of course, when the developed countries have spent their capital and efforts on
the education and training of the workforce of the undeveloped part of the world.
Historically speaking, most of the developed countries have already used the resources of
the undeveloped world to enrich themselves-look at their colonial past. Now, when they
have reached the peaks of advancement and prosperity, it is their turn to invest
wholeheartedly in development projects and to set up schools and colleges and to work
for the economic progress in general of the Third World. Then, after the’common people
have made the required progress and industrial and agriculture production is of a high
order, the restrictions on imports can be lifted. Competition, so to say, should be between
equals and not between unequals.

If the developed countries transfer their scientific methods and technologies to the
developing countries generously and start educating the common people devotedly, the
coming into force of ”true globalization” sometime in the future will become possible.
Until the developing world comes up to the level of the developed world sociologically,
economically and politically, it will be impossible to have one-world economy and social
system.

The developing or backward world looks with suspicion and awe (fear and wonder) at the
globalization plans of the developed world. It is time the governments of the

developing Countries woke un to the realities nf the world situation and tnr>V
rpi/nlntinnarv

. hands of me corrupt minority to spend masses, ft is ttae

steps i” «-•-- - . . n the education, training and progress 01 xnc mosata. « ^ _,

° onomic programmes to construct dams, produce cheap electricity and to increase

eoricultural and industrial production for the general uplift of society.

3g^ 37. The Olympic Games

”Olympic” comes from the ancient Greek Olympus or Olympia. Mount Olympus was a
nlace where games were played in honour of the Greek god Zeus. Here an ancient Greek
festival was held every four years with athletic, literary and musical competitions. Now,
the Olympic Games are an international sports festival held every four years since 1896
in different countries. In 2000 the Olympic Games were held in Sydney, Australia for

sixteen days in September,

While in ancient Greece games were held every four years in the summer, in the Roman
period they were condemned and later were discontinued at the end of the 4th century.
The games played in Greece we’re truly national in significance (meaning) as the city
states placed success in the Olympics on a higher level than that of battles.

At first, the Olympic games were restricted to running. Later, many new events were
added like the long run, boxing, wrestling, the foot race with armour (defensive covering
for the body). The winners of the Olympics were crowned and rewarded. Women used to
have separate Olympic contests every four years, but with fewer events.

The Modern Olympic games started regularly at London in 1908, and since then the
games have been held in cities the world over. The number of entrants, competing nations
and events have grown steadily. But, the First World War prevented the Olympic meeting
in 1916. The Second World War prevented it in 1940 and 1944.

The traditional track and field athletics include the decathlon (100-metre, 400-metre and
1500-metre runs) and pentathlon (300-metre freestyle swim, 4000-metre cross-country
run, 5000-metre 40-jump horse race, target shooting, etc.). Other many games and sports
are besides. For example, cycling, swimming, diving, shooting, volleyball, rowing, riding
sports, soccer, hockey, weightlifting, boxing, gymnastics, wrestling, and so on The winter
games included ice hockey, skinning and skating. Since 1944, the winter games have
been held in even-numbered years in which summer games are not contested.

Pakistan qualified for taking part in the 2000 Olympics in rowing, sailing, boxing,
hockey, shooting, etc. However, it is sad to say that there were no nation-wide Olympic
exercises and preparations, and so we failed to score any wins. Now, we should prepare
for the next Olympic games in earnest. The Pakistan Olympic Association and Pakistan
Sports Board should arrange games and sports on regular basis in different cities and
towns for their promotion on national scale. After rigorous contests and competitions,
lists of deserving candidates for the next Olympics should be prepared.

The Olympic games have definite advantages. They promote a happy competition
between different states, and this promotes international standards of games. Each state
makes yearlong preparations for the Olympics and >ts players compete with each other in
the best possible ways. This promotes nationalism. That is why the players from
individual states take on their national colour, and feel that they are playing for their

countries.

On the other hand, the participating countries in the Olympic games contribute to
international co-operation and goodwill. Representative sportsmen from most countries
get together in the host country with the knowledge that they are competing
internationally. They play and compete with the feeling that they belong to the world.
188 e.fi. English Simple Grammar Si Composition

Sometimes political considerations affect the sports events. It perhaps started to be

witnessed at Berlin in Germany when the Nazis asserted their national superiority to all
other players. Between 1952 and 1988 the US and the Soviet Union were in so much of
political rivalry that each boycotted the games played in the other country. So, the
Americans did not attend the Olympic games in 1980 in Moscow. The Russians did not
attend the Olympic games in 1984 in Los Angeles. In 1972 Rhodesia was excluded from
the Olympic games in Munich (Germany).

Commercial interests also play their role when the Olympic games are arranged in the
host country. The television networks earn huge amounts when they televise the games,
and also flash advertisements of commercial organizations. The whole world of
newspapers and magazines is in action to report the sports events to earn money and
fame. Go east or west, north or south or move into towns or valleys, everywhere the topic
most talked about is Olympics.

The Olympic games bring hopes of success to the competing groups of players. Whatever
their performances, they leave the playgrounds and competition fields with the feeling
that they did their best after all. We played the best way Though all played better than
ever Success is in the manner of playing Not so much in the awards, (zrk)

38. Human Rights Abuses (Violations)

1. The Introduction-Hie meaning of human rights through the ages.

2. Human rights abuses in different countries and societies (a) on the international level,
(b) on the national level.

3. Steps taken or being taken to put an end to human rights abuses.

4. The Conclusion-The future of human rights in the world.

hi the Greek city-states, about two thousand seven hundred years ago, the citizens
enjoyed the right to vote. The male citizens enjoyed the right to property and equality
before the law. However, the women did not enjoy equal rights with men. They could not
vote and could not appear in law courts to defend their rights. They were represented by
men. Then the slaves did not enjoy any rights as, according to Aristotle, they were a ”sort
of living possession” of then- owners. Then, later, Europe and the rest of the world passed
through several forms of government, mainly kingship and dictatorship, during which
human beings did not enjoy any notable rights. We know the long dark ages of Europe
which continued from the 5* to 15th centuries that saw no worthwhile development of
human rights except for Muslim Spain where some progress was made in this regard in
the 8* century.

In fact Islam in the 7th century set forth (explained) public and private rights in a codified
form on the basis of which a modern social welfare state could be established. Hazrat
Muhammad (peace be upon him) presented the concept (general idea) of human rights in
his celebrated last farewell address. He laid emphasis on the equality of all men before
God, the rights of slaves or servants, women and wives and the rights of all to enjoy their
property and money freely and suitably. Later democratic developments in England,
France and the US resulted in the form of law guaranteeing rights of human beings,
democratic equality and justice. The UNO charter of human rights is again a repetition of
their principles. Our own constitution contains a chapter on fundamental

Writing

(basis) human rights of liberty and equality in all possible forms though its
implementation is still a far cry.

The abuse or violation of human rights is common in the less developed countries in
Asia, Africa, Europe and Latin (South) America. But, even in the advanced parts of the
world, in Europe and America, human rights are abused though not on such a vast scale.
The most painful and shameful violations of human rights have recently taken place in
Afghanistan, Kashmir, Palestine, Bosnia, Chechnya, China and in various African
countries. There has been an international outcry against human rights violations.
However, the Indian armed forces have mercilessly suppressed millions of Kashmiris
crying for freedom. Who does not know about the mass killings, imprisonments and use
of cruel force in the Indian occupied Kashmir?

The Palestinians have been thrust out of their home country, killed and injured by Israel.
The Serbs in the former Yugoslavia have committed acts of the greatest cruelty on the
Bosnians though the United Nations took steps to improve the situation. The Russians
killed thousands of Chechnyans in order to maintain their rule, hi Africa thousands of
people have been killed and in central Asia many more are being killed and wounded on
account of political and religions differences. Dictatorships in Nigeria, Uganda, Ethiopia
and Somalia have caused large-scale killings and widespread destruction. Dictatorial
governments and old-styled social systems in South America are responsible for massive
cruelty and killings, hi Colombia South America) thousands were killed illegally
(extrajudicially), in Brazil, Peru and other countries many more were thrust into prisons
without proper trial. According to Amnesty International human rights violations in 146
countries are common. v

On our national scene human rights violations in the from of child labour in factories and
homes, cruelty to women, police torture (giving physical pain), denial of equal rights to
the poor and helpless in selection for government and private jobs, favour shown to the
rich and powerful in the grant of bank loans and economic benefits, cruelty by stronger
religions and social groups to weaker groups (sectarian cruelty) and large-scale injustice
by employers to the employees or workers on village farms and in production centres are
among the common violations of human rights in the society. Child beating in the home
is a familiar violation of human rights.
The Constitution provides, as stated at the start of this essay, for protection against the
violation of most of the human rights. Yet the rights continue to be abused through the
length and breadth of the country. Besides the protection of the Constitution, we need to
take some other urgent measures to ensure the non-violation of the rights. Firstly, the
common people should be educated in the shortest possible time to certain reasonable
standards. The educated masses, then, would understand how to exercise their rights,
protect themselves and their rights from powerful and aggressive groups. These groups
will not be able to aggress (start an attack or quarrel) against and crush poorer, but
educated people.

Secondly, all possible efforts should be made to bring about economic justice as early as
possible. The feudal (”jagirdari”) system in the villages should be broken up speedily.
Large land holdings should be taken away and the released land should be divided into
medium-size units to be cultivated by poorer farmers with government help. The water
resources should be put to the best use to the benefit of all.

Thirdly, in and around the cities, the businesses and industries should be induced (caused)
to employ educated labour and pay them handsomely. Surely, the work done by
educated and trained workers will justify higher wages. The principle ”To everyone
according to his work, from everyone according to his capacity” should be the guiding
principle in .business and industry. The qualitative and quantitative improvement j^
business dealings and industrial production would definitely result in boosted exports and
foreign exchange earnings. Business and industry will expand creating job opportunities
for thousands each year.

Fourthly, the law of the land should be modified (changed) according to our changing
economic, social and political needs. New laws should be framed to meet new situations.
However, all laws, whether old or new, should take effect (come into operation) either
automatically (that is, by government action) or when referred to courts by the citizens.
Needless delays in justice in the courts should be avoided like wild fire. The judicial
system should be expanded and strengthened in such a masterly fashion that all the state
agencies, powers and parties, connected with the government or not, are answerable to
and punishable by it.

No doubt certain, international human rights agencies like the Amnesty International, a
London-based human rights body, the International Labour Organization and United
Nations Centre for Human Rights are working together for the protection of human
rights. The UNO in this respect should have greater powers to impose sanctions on
countries that are guilty of violating human rights. Without the power to act against such
countries the existence of international human rights institutions would be, more or less,
unfruitful.

Inside the country human rights organizations like the Edhi Trust, the Ansar Burney
Trust, the Aurat Foundation and several other Non-governmental Organizations (the
NGOs) are actively busy safeguarding the interests of the weak. These agencies are, in
the main, co-operating with each other and with international human rights organizations
through conferences, exchange of information and ideas and materials for help to be
provided to the needy. Now the need for active co-operation of the government with these
bodies is being felt on an urgent basis.

The future of human rights is brighter, no doubt in developed democracies, and as much
darker, in the half-democracies, dictatorships, autocracies and oligarchies (governments
by small groups of all-powerful people). Even in the Islamic states the sun of human
rights is covered with the clouds of obscurantism, backwardness and reactionary
attitudes. The use of reason and intelligence, the basis of ijtahad, can help in the lifting of
these clouds from the fair face of justice.

39. Pakistan as an Atomic Power (or) Nuclear Explosions By Pakistan

1. The Introduction-Causes of Pakistan’s decision to conduct atomic tests.

2. Results or consequences of Pakistan successful testing of nuclear weapons.

3. What Pakistan can and should do in the present national and international situation.

4. The Conclusion-Responsibilities of other countries towards Pakistan as a nuclear

power.

It was in May 1998 that Pakistan exploded six atomic bombs in Balochistan to become
the world’s seventh nuclear power (after the US, UK, France, Russia, China and India).
India was already a nuclear power after its first nuclear explosion in 1974. But she
conducted five atomic tests in early May 1998 in Rajasthan in order to become a
”declared” nuclear power which she did become. Then started a series of threats and
warnings that the Indian leaders hurled (threw) or directed towards Pakistan. It was
demanded of Pakistan to withdraw from Azad Kashmir or face a march of the Indian

essov Citing

n1\ into it. Already the Indian army, air force planes, tanks and sophisticated (most xiern
and developed) weapons far outnumbered those in possession of Pakistan. With a ”dear
support and cover India was finding it possible to dictate’its terms to Pakistan. In ui«
situation, when Pakistanis were not prepared to accept Indian dictation and ,omination,
they cried with one voice for immediate atomic tests and preparation. The results of
Pakistan’s successful nuclear tests were highly favourable to her at least . jjjC military
and political fields. Firstly, the balance of power which was weighing heavily on India’s
side after here nuclear testing of early May was suitably corrected. After her own nuclear
testing Pakistan could herself warn India of an atomic war and la e-scale destruction in
case she attacked Azad Kashmir or any part of Pakistan. Soon after Pakistan’s testing and
possible deployment (arrangement for military action) of the nuclear weapons on here
Ghauri missiles, the war fever of the Indians came down and their violent excitement
(frenzy) evaporated.

Sccondh. Pakistan emerged (appeared) on the world map as the only Islamic nuclear
power alter her atomic tests. For all the Islamic countries it was a matter of pride.
Pakistan’s scientific and technological power was recognized by them all.

Thirdly, the Kashmir problem, which was rather being taken lightly by the world powers
and the UNO, came into the limelight (became very prominent) in world politics or was
projected well. The world came to understand that the atomic explosions by India and
Pakistan were the directly connected with the-long standing Kashmir dispute. The US,
UK and France, especially, felt the need of getting this dispute settled. They tried to bring
Pakistan and India to the conference table, but India refused to enter into any kind of
negotiations (serious talks) with a third party as a mediator (peacemaker between two
sides). All this was taken note by all the important countries in the background of the

Kashmir dispute.

But, the nuclear tests conducted by Pakistan had some negative results too. Firstly, the
world powers like the US, Japan and Britain and the International Monetary Fund (IMF,
an agency of the UNO) imposed sanctions against Pakistan (like they did against India)
stopping all the funds and loans that Pakistan was receiving. As a result, the economy of
the country suffered greatly. There was an acute (serious) shortage of foreign exchange
and the prices of several imported goods registered a sharp increase (rise). The
government had to impose some new taxes like the general sales tax and had to raise the
price of oil. The common people were the main sufferers.

Secondly, the government found it necessary to impose emergency and suspend the
fundamental (basic) rights in the country. It had to freeze all foreign currency accounts in
the banks with the result that the account holders were left with rupees in place of foreign
currencies. The Pakistanis in foreign countries either stopped remitting (sending) foreign
exchange for the time being or curtailed (restricted) it to the maximum. The business of
the stock markets came to a halt and the prices of shares fell drastically (very much). As a
result, the shareholders suffered huge losses. The country was truly caught in a whirlpool
of economic losses and was in a deep crisis.

It may be added that certain Islamic countries offered oil to Pakistan on credit Others,
especially Saudi Arabia, offered aid without strings. Now, in the post-nuclear tests period,
the government should take the people into confidence and introduce policies for rapid
economic development. Side by side, education of the people should be started on better
and more effective lines to attain maximum literacy. In all these processes all the main
industrialists, capitalists and landowners should provide funds for the implementation of
these policies.

The exports of the country should be boosted (pushed upwards) by increasing the
production of exportable goods and material and by finding more and better markets for
their acceptance.

Though the government has tried to curtail unnecessary expenses in the offices and
departments there is need to further check them. In this connection unwanted huge
institutions like the Senate can be wound up (closed) Unproductive and not really needed
projects like motorway M3 (from Islamabad to Peshawar) should be held in abeyance
(suspended for a certain period) in favour of other more urgent schemes for repairing and
widening the existing roads.

Now, other countries, especially the advanced ones, should understand Pakistan’s
compulsion to explode the bombs in May 1998. They should try directly to bring home to
India that the settlement of the Kashmir dispute can only bring the nuclear race in this
area to an end. If the Kashmir problem is solved, Indian can better defend herself against
China. Both Pakistan and India stand to gain if they do not expand their nuclear
preparations.

40. Child Labour (P.U.)

1. The Introduction- Child labour in Pakistan and other countries.

2. Causes of making poor children work for money.

3. Ways of making poor children study and prepare for suitable professions.

4. The role of the developed countries and world organizations like the ILO
(International Labour Organization) and the UNO in the child labour situation.

5. The Conclusion-Without active national planning and international co-operation child

labour in the developing countries cannot be put an end to.

Child labour at the cost of the child’s future is now common in the developing and poor
countries. The UNICEF (United Nations International Children Education Fund), in
collaboration with governments, annually celebrates the Universal Children’s Day in
more than 180 countries. On this day parents and societies are called upbn to consider the
needs of children and to improve their lot (condition and situation) through health care,
education and new laws. In most of the developing countries like Pakistan, India,
Bangladesh, Burma, most of the African countries, South American and East European
and other developing countries 50 million children are engaged in manual work to earn
for themselves and their families. And, children earn even through sex, for the pleasure of
rich adults.
Firstly, the children in the developing countries from poor families cannot study. Their
parents cannot afford their school and study expenditures. Secondly, the poor families are
normally very large, and the bread earner is the male head who single-handedly cannot
meet the needs of each member. In order to add to the income of the family the children,
of the ages ranging from eight to fifteen, get employed in car workshops, filling stations,
restaurants, bakeries, shops of different kinds, offices of firms and companies, student
hotels, private homes, roadside eateries (lunchrooms), brick kilns (large ovens for
preparing bricks), manufacturing centres, factories, tanneries, roaming trucks, buses and
railway trains and so on. These children get ordinary returns for tne same work that
fetches substantially high wages to adults. They have no choice but (except) to work
wherever they can get it, for otherwise they themselves would live below the poverty

essov UMttng

1 would not get two square meals a day or would die in sickness. Or, their families

l’d be in distress without their name.

Secondly, most of the parents of these working children are illiterate and ignorant. They
h’nk that school education, if at all some children can get it, would only be decorative
and
• oractical. The children are either not sent to school, or they are taken out of it to be
iened to mechanics in workshops or foremen in factories to be trained for a ”practical”
future. A newspaper has recently reported about ”nine-years olds carrying loads of bricks
their heads under the supervision of oversees ready to whip the child who slowed down.”
Th£n ”girls chained in windowless huts in distant areas of the country working on
handicrafts,” ”underfed boys in India preparing toys and garments for children in the
affluent (rich) West,” And, the International Labour Organization reported to the UNO
that 3-3- Million Pakistani children were employed in tough jobs including agriculture,
carpet wearing, tanneries, sports goods industries, brick kilns, transport and domestic
services. More than treble of this number is engaged in perhaps more exacting (or
demanding) jobs in India. But these wretched, unfortunate young denizens (inhabitants)
of the earth that belong to all humanity have poor, uneducated parents, inefficient and
cruel social, political and economic systems. They continue to be crushed under the
weights of these systems and their youth passes in utter (complete) hopelessness,
thankless labour and un-rewarded effort. In old age they are penniless wrecks except for
those who are exceptionally bright and can manage to acquire professional abilities in
fields like welding, sewing, motor mechanics, carpet weaving, tube-well drilling and the
like.

Thirdly, the successive governments of most of the developing countries have failed to
utilize state funds and resources for the uplift, education and training of the masses.
Because of their disappointing inefficiency and failure to organize mass education
programmes most of the people are uneducated, uncultured and backward. The
professional or vocational education demanded by the Modern world is si” ply
nonexistent in villages, shantytowns (with poorly made huts and ordinary houses) and
city slums (dirty crowded areas) where most of the people live. The roads are broken and
the surroundings are unhygienic. The people are diseased, mentally sick and physically
week. They have many children in each family with a very meagre (ordinary) income.
The much-needed health care centres, hospitals, schools, training academies and adult
education facilities are simply non-existent. Added to this, the unbridgeable gulf between
the wealthy few and the poor in society continues to exist.

fourthly, the advanced countries, through their agencies and leaders, continue to develop
contacts with the businesspersons, industrialists, civil servants and rich leaders of the
poor countries. They do not care to spend some of their resources and utilize a part of heir
vast funds of knowledge for the betterment of the poor. They provide aid and funds
0 the rich of these countries for the so called ”development purposes.” The funds are
misused or stolen by the leaders and no kind of social reconstruction is possible.

mid labour can be brought to an end when large-scale social and economic reforms e
ettect in the developing countries. Firstly, education should be made common and the
eracy rate should be raised at all costs. Professional schools for workshop training, a ,C °r
aiu* car repairing, welding, computer operations and industrial and agricultural ” luttl»S
snou^ be set UP- State funds, in whatever form they can be made available (here

^ at” for example) should be provided to the poorest families.

j coun • Second Place> tne feudal or ”jagirdari” system is our and other developing |
tries should be brought to an end. The big landowners, who control the working
population of the country and determine their futures, will, then, not be able to keep tn
labourers and farmers uneducated and backward. With education facilities available all
around and the workers free to choose their careers, the need for child labour \vjn
evaporate (disappear).

In the third place, the uneducated city people should be provided suitable j0(,
opportunities and facilities of education for their children. With assured incomes, secures
futures and education facilities in plenty, the parents will find it possible to keep (prevent)
their children from labouring outside at the cost of their studies and futures.
41. Family Planning-Overpopulation (Pun., Mul.)

1. The Introduction-Overpopulation in the world.

2. Meaning of ”family planning.”

3. Family planning and the developing countries.

4. The role of the Family Planning and Social Welfare Departments.

5. Reduction in the birth rate through late marriages.

6. To provide more recreation (amusement) to the people.

7. To improve (better) living standards.

8. To educate the masses (the lower classes of people).

The problem of overpopulation has become very serious. Many Asian and African
countries are now faced with a kind of population explosion. Quite a few European
countries and even parts of the US had been in trouble. These countries arrested this
quick growth in population through family planning.

”Family planning” means controlling the size of the family. It aims at having a family in
which the number of its members suits well its income or resources. It also aims at
having a family whose members can live at ease in the house. Thus, a family with a low
income and a small house should not have a quick increase in its children.

The developing countries stand in great need of family planning. It is so because their
population is increasing much faster than that of the developed countries. Most of the
families in them have limited incomes and small houses to live in. In the villages ordinary
field-workers live with their families in small huts or cottages. In the cities labourers,
workers in offices, banks, etc. also live in small houses. All such workers in the villages
and cities are, in fact, more than 80 per cent of our population.

The head of a large, poor family often gets week and ill and old before time. It is so
because he has to work very hard to meet the growing expenses of his ”growing”
familyHe is all the time worried about them. His wife is equally worried about the food
she has to cook and the clothes she has to sew and wash for the family. If her children are
big enough, they can help her in household work. But, then they cannot study
wellFortunately (luckily), more and more families in the cities are feeling the need of
having families of a proper size.

The Family Planning and Social Welfare Departments give useful advice to different
categories of people about the advantages of a small family through posters, films, radio
and television programmes, direct discussions, and so on. They advise them about the
ways of controlling births of children The Family Planning or the Social Welfa’e
Department should inform them about the need for marriages above a certain ag^>
especially in the villages.

We should have more parks, clubs and other places of recreation for the common people.
The people will like to pass more of their time there instead of in their homes.

Writing

195

should improve the living standards of the people by providing them better jobs salaries.
As they earn more money, they will have more activities and

ith

joyrnents. For all this quick economic development of the country is essential (very

necessary).

A family planning programme can be really successful if most of the people are ducated.
Educated people can easily understand and feel the benefits of family planning nd the
benefits of practising it. It is, of course, the need of the hour to educate our

masses.

42. Ehtesab-Accountability

1 The Introduction-The meaning of ”ehtesab” or accountability. How ”ehtesab” was

introduced in Pakistan.

2 The working of ”ehtesab” in our country.

3 How we can implement (put into practice) ”ehtesab” truly and effectively.

4 The Conclusion-Reforms and changes are needed for the introduction of a true
”ehtesab.”

”Ehtesab” or accountability means that any person who holds a position or authority is
answerable for his acts and deeds. As we all are answerable to God Almighty for all that
we do in this world, so are the public or government servants and people in high authority
are answerable to the higher authorities, the courts and the government for their misdeeds
in any for they might be. It is an accounts sheet like the bank balance-sheet showing the
positive and negative points of one’s performance in one’s official or semi-official
capacity, the feathers in one’s cap and the black spots in one’s career. This sheet should
be available for every government officer, politician, parliamentarian, minister and
anyone performing social and economic functions in an office, firm, company or any
other working place. It is necessary to have a complete possibility of ”ehtesab” in our
society in which corruption, inefficiency, maladministration (misadministration) and
favouritism have touched the highest peaks of mountains of dishonesty and corruption.
The poor and helpless citizens, who are in the majority, can only break their necks and
heads \vhen they hit these mountains of corruption in their efforts to have their work done
in offices and public organizations. When they can bribe the officials or can offer them
expensive presents, they do succeed in getting some of their rights from the powerful
officials. But these who cannot pay for getting what is of course their due, lose all hope in
the process of defeat at the hands of corrupt” authorities.”

Considering the urgent need for the eradication (total removal) of corruption and
^efficiency from government departments and centres of power, our previous Parliament
appreciably passed the Ehtesab Act in 1997 which had very high, noble and useful
Purposes and aims. The Chairman of the Ehtesab Bureau (= department) was given
almost mited P°wers to bring all the rulers including the President, Prime Minster and s
vernor and government officers of whatever rank to book, that is, to require them to

xplain their conduct. The Ehtesab Bureau, with all its powerful machinery of workers

er the Chairman, was given wide powers to give corrupt public officers a fair trial in

esab courts and to get them punished deservedly by way of imprisonment, fine and

NAR at’°n ^takin8 P°ssess) of their properties by the government. Later, in 1999, the

eff ^at’onal Accountability Bureau) Ordinance was promulgated (was made to take

efT • ^ ^e m’’’tarv government. This Ordinance was amended in 2001 to make it more

Secectlve-II is heartening to note that quite a few high government servants of the rank of

retaries and above were punished by the Ehtesab and NAB courts. To note with further
pleasure, some ex-ministers, prime ministers and politicians were brought into the net of
the NAB and higher courts on charges of corruption. They were made to pay back their
loans with fines and were put behind the bars. It is the need of the hour to catch, try and
punish all and sundry (= each and all), in or out of office in the Islamic Republic and to
set high examples of perfect justice and unexampled fair play.

”Ehtesab” in Pakistan has a history, but not a very happy record of just trial and deserved
punishment of corrupt politicians and public servants. Ayub Khan declared ”corrupt”
politicians disqualified for holding public offices under PRODA (Public and
Representative Offices Disqualification Act). However, strangely speaking, several of the
disqualified politicians and high government officers found their way back to seats of
power through further corruption, misuse of law processes and favouritism. It is hoped
that the trials conducted and punishments awarded by the National Accountability Bureau
’ would be effective and fruitful in the true sense, not mere (only) fairyland stories of
adventure. No one, from the highest to the lowest office, should go unpunished who has
made use of public or government money for personal ends (purposes) or has misused his
authority for seriously objectionable aims.

Surely, the functioning of the NAB against those committing election frauds is necessary
and welcome. In a country where the masses (common people) are mostly illiterate or
ignorant and poor to the lowest degree, it is easy to misguide them or to purchase their
votes. When the so-called elected assemblies come into existence on the basis of corrupt
practices in elections, which we witness on every occasion, we cannot be ruled properly.
The elected assemblies, as a result, cannot frame or pass laws that are truly needed by the
society for quick and effective reforms and progress. Luckily, the NAB Ordinance
provides a suitable framework of trial and punishments for all those who indulge in
electoral corruption and malpractices. Those who get elected to public bodies through
electoral frauds stand disqualified and also can be imprisoned for several years. In
addition to the NAB Ordinance, happily, the application of criminal laws to electoral and
other forms of corruption continues unchecked. So, if the law is suitably and effective!}
applied, corruption can be checked a great deal.

However, for a lasting and permanent treatment of the disease of corruption in Pakistan
much more than the operation of the NAB Ordinance is needed,. First, we need to
educate our masses on a large scale in order to make them understand their rights and
duties Second, the social and economic ills in the form of the feudal or ”jagirdari” system
and corruption in offices need to be rooted out. This will contribute to social and
economic equality. Third, a very appropriate (right or suitable) political system needs to
be introduced which can replace the parliamentary system of government. Fourth, the
government in power needs to take revolutionary steps to increase agricultural and
industrial production resulting in the lowering of prices within the country and in greaW
exports. Fifth, a sense (feeling) of high morality and devotion to noble principle5’
necessarily to be created among the people through the utmost (greatest) use of the niasi
media (the radio, TV and the press) and our places of worship and educational
institutio118 Then, and then alone, will we be prepared to explain our acts to our seniors
and our cou and to God Almighty in the ultimate (final) analysis. It will be a continuing
and naW1 process of explanation and punishments after a moral understanding (vision)
dawns up

the people. If accountability goes slow or the criminals manage to save themselves in
someNV

every government will stand discredited in the public eye.

43. Taxation in Pakistan (or) The Need for A Tax Culture The Introduction. What
taxation means, -i Customs and excise duties. ”’ genefits of taxation. A problems of
taxation in Pakistan. / The distribution of the tax-survey forms.

’ opposition to the tax survey. What was more desirable0

7 The Conclusion. Taxation in an expanding econorm The need of the hour.

Tax means money that people have to pay to the government. People pay taxes

ccording to their incomes. Businesspersons pay taxes according to their profits. There are

direct and indirect taxes. Direct taxes are collected directly from incomes and wealth. The

in types of these taxes are income tax, corporation tax, capital gains tax (tax on profits

iade ffam the sale of investments or property) and inheritance tax. Then there ar indirect
taxes that are collected by the Customs and Excise Department. These taxes are paid
when people buy goods and services. The General Sales Tax (GST) in our country is its
most familiar example. The big shopkeepers, under this tax, are required to pay fifteen
percent of the price of most of the goods sold to the Excise Department. The Value Added
Tax (VAT) is imposed on the difference between the value of goods sold by a firm and the
value of goods purchased by it from other firms.

Customs duties are taxes levied by the government on goods imported into the country.
These taxes are designed to discourage foreign companies from selling their goods in the
country. Excise duties are taxes paid on goods produced in the country like shoes, cloth,
paper, cold drinks, and so on. Other taxes on motor vehicles, registration and transfer,
house and land transfers, passport fees, withholding taxes on bank profits, taxes on the
prizes won on prize bonds and fees paid to the courts in different cases are some of the
main sources of government income.

Now, taxes are the lifeblood of the economy of a country, and their payment to the
government is necessary and should be unavoidable. The need for the establishment of a
tax culture in the country for its smooth running is essential.

Firstly, taxes of various kinds provide the government means to initiate (start)
development projects, set up industries and production centres of goods of daily use and
exportable items. It is for the government to use the taxes for the greater good of the
country and nation instead of spending them mostly on facilities, comforts and luxuries of
fee ruling and official classes.

Secondly, taxes are used to raise the prices of harmful goods such as cigarettes and
objectionable activities such as horseracing and gambling.

thirdly, when the rich are taxed suitably, the incomes of the rich reduce considerably

rwging them nearer the poorer sections of the society. Taxation, moreover, enables the
°°^ernnient to make better facilities and opportunities for progress available to the less
and ^° s.ect’ons °f society. In this way, the government sets up public hospitals, parks
exni .cati°nal institutions and spends on roads, railways, telecommunications and hon
°fat’on °f natural resources like oil and gas for facilitating social progress. We need to

FOU k th’S scenario in the country.

”tekef y’.taxes ’mposed on imported goods raise their prices on the local markets. This
Therer Oreign goods expensive and encourages the production and sale of our own
goods. imp0rt°je’ taxation plays a positive role for the national industry and trade.
Taxation on

F’fthl ^°0<k ’n Pakistan can be justified on this count alone.

them and’)OS’t’Ve taxat’on helps in raising the prices of goods. People then spend less
on rather ne ’ •US’ ”Cation (disproportionate rise in prices) is checked. However, this is a
gative way of checking inflation, and is inapplicable to us.
Lastly, taxes enable the government to maintain the defence forces and the police f0r
external defence and internal peace. The government must have enough funds for the
protection of the country and society.

Taxation has a few serious problems in Pakistan. Firstly, corruption in the taxation
departments has not been removed despite efforts by the government. The taxpayer js
justified to object to the tax collection officers’ attempts to take away what should be
deposited in the government treasury.

Secondly, the salaried classes and government servants feel highly upset when they fi^
rich businesspersons and capitalists avoiding the payment of taxes.

Thirdly, as said earlier, the taxpayer is unhappy with the absence of facilities and
comforts that the government should provide with the tax money. In fact, ministers
powerful government officers, and highly placed people spend lots of money on festivals
comforts and enjoyments all the tune. They ride roughshod over the commoners
shamelessly, and even avoid the payment of taxes. The taxpayer, then, finds it futile
(useless) to go on paying taxes without tangible (concrete) positive results.

It was to streamline (to make it more efficient) the system of taxation and economy that
the government issued the tax survey forms to the business community and the public in
July 2000 or thereabouts. The details of one’s business, industry, incomes, possessions
and expenditures were to be provided in different columns of these forms. The aim was to
document the economy and to collect taxes from the businesspeople and the public on a
regular basis. Unluckily, because of their ignorance and fears, the businesspeople mostly
refused to fill in the forms. They went on strike several times in protest. They feared that,
as earlier, most of their taxes would not be spent on public welfare projects. They
suspected that the tax officials would begin troubling them with the help of the details in
the forms. At the worst, they expected of them demands of illegal gratification under
threats of punishment.

The unions and associations of the businesspersons held talks with the government, and it
was finally decided that the tax forms would by simplified and concessions of time and
reduced rates of taxes would be granted. Finally, they were brought round to fill in the
forms and pay the taxes. It would have been better if the government had taken steps to
educate and train the illiterate shopkeepers before distributing the forms. Far better
would have been to break up the timewom feudal (”jagirdari”) system in the country. The
battle for the betterment of the economy should have been started in the strongholds of
the big agricultural capitalists. With the money of these bloodsuckers, a crash education
programme should have been implemented. Then, within three to five years, the entire
country should have been got into the tax net. No doubt, the tax evaders (avoiders), the ’
defaulters and the looters of public money that included previous ministers and rulers,
members of the so-called elected assemblies, entrenched (protected) high civil servants,
industrialists and crooked (dishonest) shopkeepers should ha ve been made to pay back
the loans and looted money with the taxes side by side. Clearly, if that could not be
completely done, it can be done now when all state power is centred in one reliable
organization without the opposition of dirty capitalists sitting in the assemblies with their
bellies full of ill-gotten wealth.

When tax expansion goes hand in hand with an expanding economy and greater •
employment opportunities, people accept taxes with a smile. Otherwise, upward trends ill
taxation, like soaring prices and shrinking employment, only add to the woes (suffering)
of the taxpayers. Let there be more business, more industry, more incomes, more
expansion in employment, and then let the people pay more.

Now, the need of the hour is to tax the wealthier sections of the society more, but with
caution and prudence (wisdom). The poorer sections should, no doubt, be taxed less, but
they should be made to work diligently (with effort) for the society or country. Taxation

fcS»«T

Id be such as to encourage investment in business and industry, unlike the freeze on

currency accounts by the previous government in all its greed and childish

currency uww^v.,..- ^_, - , ,_,_.- _

’dity. Taxation hi the country should not, in any case, dry up production by sucking stuP
t me water that lies hidden or partially visible at the bottom in the wells. away 44. The
Current Economic Situation

The Introduction-What has always been wrong about our economic situation. Causes of
the economic breakdown in the present tunes. ’ -r-pg best cures for the diseased economic
system. ’ Tj,e Conclusion-No efforts should be spared to stop the people from getting
used to

economic inaction.

The economy of our country has been sick along with that of several other South Asian
untries that rightly form the club of ”sick men of Asia” as once Turkey was ”the sick man
of Europe.” The sickness of these countries is not innate (possessed from birth) or
intrinsic (coming from within), but transfused (transferred or instilled into) from the ugly,
deformed and diseased bodies of their filthy (dirty and nasty) politicians, landowners,
mill-owners, capitalists and criminals who have indulged in corruption ’of various kinds.
The blood of the country has been sucked shamelessly by these corrupt people, for
example, when they smuggled, hoarded (stocked or stored for profit), black-marketed
goods and stole the goods and food grains produced in the country, did not pay the taxes,
took loans not to return, made use of state facilities illegally like driving government
vehicles privately and using state funds for personal benefit, took commissions or
kickbacks (payments from sales) on state purchases or imported or smuggled foreign
goods in order to earn profits at the cost of the national industry, and so on.
The first main cause of the current economic breakdown is of course the social and
economic system. When most of the population is illiterate, ignorant and extremely poor,
even after more than half a century of independence, how can the country progress and be
prosperous? The feudal lords, industrialists or capitalists and bureaucrats (cruel officials
of the government) and politicians together have kept the masses backward and poor. So
they cannot work on advanced machines and engage in production of sophisticated
(highly developed and complex) electronic, engineering and other machines for use
within the country and for export. They cannot industrialize their farming nor can
improve the quality and quantity of their crops according to the advanced methods.

The second cause of the present economic crisis (most difficult and trying tune) is the

government policies that have not promoted (advanced) scientific and technological

studies. As a result, the country could not have a sound scientific base productive of

scientists and experts of a high order. What to talk of mechanical and chemical inventions

0 match the peculiar requirements of our agriculture and industry, we could not produce

°st of the parts of the machines and chemicals in use on our farms. The whole car and

fus .^ustry, set up with foreign collaboration (co-operation), continued to depend on

oreign producers. The aeroplane, railway and shipbuilding and suchlike industries could

oth estaD”shed on a commercial scale. As a result, the country remained dependent on

er countries in running her industries. The failure to set up industries producing

im ° CS’ c’oc’cs> high-class cosmetics and luxury goods has made us dependent on their

endl’ ^Uf ^ai’ure to Pr°duce several refined medicines has forced us to import them

me ,essly in huge quantities spending our already short foreign exchange. The standard

lcmes that are being produced in the country are mostly the result of our collaboration

ymm
with multi-national industries that send most of their profits to the foreign countries to
which they belong.

The third cause of the serious economic recession (decline) is the utter (total) failure to
start running the closed or sick industrial units and to set up new ones. The causes of the
closure of a number of cotton factories, for example, have not been intelligently explored
nor efforts made to restart their production. If the cotton produced in the country has not
been enough or up to the mark for our requirements, proper research has not been
conducted to remove the causes of decline in cotton production. It means that a proper
coordination between industrial and agricultural production has not been maintained.
Another such area of imbalance is that of sugarcane production in the fields and sugar
production in the factories. It means that a proper synchronization (co-ordination)
between agricultural and industrial production has not been maintained.

The fourth cause of our economic slackness is the failure of our nationalized factories and
manufacturing centres to improve their working by offsetting the negative results of
socialization and nationalization. The government made efforts to denationalise or
deregulate most of them through auction. Only some industries like the cement factories
performed better after de-nationalization, but others could not show improvement
because they had been damaged beyond repair or were running in huge losses. In some
cases industrial units were unacceptable to private buyers.

The fifth cause of the economic disorder is the faulty functioning of our banks and other
financial institutions. Who does not know that the banks advanced billions of rupees to
the favourites of the government and their own friends without proper guarantees?
Resultantly, the loans were either not paid on time or were defaulted. The wasted loans
halted the development of industry and agriculture as they had not been suitably invested.
The banks otherwise did not follow suitable investment policies in relation to the
requirements of the society because of lack of knowledge and interest of their employees.
The stock exchanges malfunctioned because certain groups captured them by
overinvestment and pushed ordinary shareholders out of business. These monopolists
determined the share prices and did not let the stock markets function according to free
market practices. The chambers of commerce and industry likewise did not contribute
positively by way of promotion of investments, improvemen| of industries and
enhancement (improvement) of exports.

The sixth cause of the worsened economic situation is the defective economic policies of
the government. We witnessed a few years ago the yellow cab scheme that was meant to
provide taxi cars to poor deserving drivers on credit. The cars were obtained by richer
people instead in the name of poor drivers. Later, most of the buyers did not pay back the
instalments to the government-owned banks, and the investment situation was badly
affected. In line with such irregular policies, a motorway was constructed mostly on
borrowed money at a huge cost. This investment could have been made on some other
road networks and projects that could have been far more beneficial. The governments,
one after another, failed to construct suitable dams in a proper number, and, as a result,
the agriculture was badly affected and electricity production could not increase. The rates
of electricity went very high after the government contracted with foreign companies
named Independent Power Projects for the production of thermal (with coal and gas)
power. The industn and agriculture suffered as expensive electricity made the products
unacceptably expensive and non-competitive in world markets.

Anting

201

the population is rising in lacs each year, and the common people are hopelessly caught
up in the whirlpool of unemployment or underemployment and inflation. The
International Monetary Fund and the advanced countries are not offering loans and help
that they used to before Pakistan’s explosion of nuclear devices. In this situation we
hould remove all the causes of economic depression and start our journey anew along the
road of economic development with the greatest effort, hope and confidence.

45. Self Reliance or Self-Dependability (or) The Need to Give Up Foreign Aid &
Loans

1 The Introduction-The meaning of self-reliance or self-dependability in the present

context of our national life.

2 How much our country is burdened with foreign debts and aids. The need to reduce
these debts and ultimately (in the end) to get free of them.

3. How we can get rid of foreign loans and help.

4. The Conclusion-The 21st century should see us as a debt-free society progressing

towards complete self-dependence.

After Pakistan’s emergence (appearance) as a world nuclear power on the world map the
advanced countries placed economic sanctions against her. The flow of loans and aid
from the World Bank, International Monetary Fund, the US, Japan and the developed
countries suddenly stopped or was reduced to the minimum. In this situation, we were
forced to give up or think of giving up our dependence on foreign loans and aid. The
selfreliance bank schemes, freezing of foreign currency accounts and adoption of
different economy measures in government and other departments and agencies are some
of the steps to reduce dependence on other countries. The recovery of stuck-up loans and
government dues running into billions of rupees was a right step to lessen (reduce)
foreign dependence. It was in the late 1990s that the whole nation woke up to the realities
of the loans, aid and help that Pakistan had been receiving from the developed countries
over the years. Every true Pakistani realized that dependence on other countries had
brought a bad name to the country. Whenever our ministers and public representatives
visited important foreign countries like the US and Japan, it was thought that getting aid
or loans was their purpose. Let us try to understand the extent (degree) to which we are
dependent on other countries and the debts that we owe them (have to pay them).

The process of aid taking started in 1953 when the elected Prime Minister of the country
having a big majority in Parliament was removed by the then Governor-General. The
politics and economics of the country were derailed. With serious food shortages taking
place because of faulty planning and management of agriculture, the government started
getting wheat as aid under US PL-480 programme. Then Pakistan entered into several
defence pacts (agreements) like the Baghdad Pact and the SEATO (South East Asian
Treaty Organization) with the US and her allies (companions) like the UK. Pakistan went
on receiving heavy military aid from the US under these pacts and other pure military
agreements. Then started the ugly game of aid and loan-getting from various agencies of
the World Bank and the IMF (International Monetary I-und) apparently (outwardly) for
economic and social development. In the 1950s, after the exports of cotton from Pakistan
”egan bringing less foreign exchange and the country’s agriculture and industry showed
little growth, the governments invited and tried to get loans and aid from abroad.
However, the US and the donor agencies imposed conditions on Pakistan (or attached
strings) while providing aid. Therefore. Pakistan was made part of the defence network of
the West against Russia and other Communist countries. For a very long time, until the
late 1980s, when Pakistan joined the non-aligned movement she was known to be a
member of the Western club, precariously (dangerously) dependent on U.S. military ^
economic aid. All through these years, she went on moving away from Russia while Indja
went on getting closer to her. The result was that India got the latest military weaponry
and scientific technology without conditions (”strings”) from Russia that helped build its
technological base on sound lines. Pakistan, on the other hand, did not get so much of
technological and scientific information, guidance and help from the US which
comparatively did not let her advance technologically. The imbalance between India and
Pakistan in industrial, scientific and technological terms in Pakistan’s disfavour is quite a
bit on account of this difference between Pakistan-US and India-Russia relationships.

In a way, what we have come to understand today, Pakistan went on moving headlong
into the net of economic and military slavery of the advanced countries led by the US
through the process of aid and loan getting. It was with serious efforts and at the risk of
damage to democracy that industrialization and agricultural and social reforms were
initiated under the first long martial law government in the country. But, in spite of
sizeable industrial, agricultural and social progress, an end to dependence on foreign aid
was nowhere in sight. The wars with India further increased (added to) the dependence of
Pakistan on aid and loans.

The second long martial law period witnessed an unexampled flow of military and
economic aid into Pakistan. The Afghanistan war of liberation against the Russian forces
started in 1979. In the following years Pakistan lent unconditional support to the Afghan
freedom fighters that won America’s instant support. The floodgates of American military
and economic aid were thrown open to Pakistan when millions of Afghan refugees also
migrated here and Pakistan’s support of the Afghan war increased manifold. This was the
start of the ugliest chapter in our history when arms, from America and Russia (through
Afghanistan) were freely obtained by militant and anti-national groups. Terrorism and
lawlessness in different forms became stories of every day reporting, especially in our
cities. The production and illegal export of heroin got encouraged a great deal in the war
situation in Afghanistan and the Frontier Province. Industrial and agricultural
development suffered, and the economic condition of the people went on declining.
Resultantly, the flow of western military and economic aid into the country made the
seople accustomed (used) to it and adversely (badly) affected their will to work and
idvance. The slow poisoning of the body politic of Pakistan (the people as a nation)
hrough foreign aid had reached its zenith (highest point).

After the separation of East Pakistan in 1971 Pakistan’s economic condition worsened is
Bangladesh refused to pay her share of foreign loans. With a decline in exports, ’akistan
went on getting more loans to correct her balance of payments position. Till ecent years
Pakistan had to pay back to the loan giving agencies over 50,000 million lollars. Pakistan
had been getting about 2100 million dollars per year as loan. In the trange situation,
Pakistan had to get further loans to make payments of interest on the ast loans.

Different schemes to reduce the burden of loans on Pakistan were introduced in recent
mes without positive results. The debt retirement and self-reliance bank accounts were
pened by the government, and the people were asked to donate. After the nuclear blasts f
1998, the foreign currency accounts in banks were frozen to get dollars for lessening
-pendence on foreign loans, but without any great gain.

The writing on the wall (something which shows that a great misfortune is to happen) the
country is clear and sharp (clear-cut). It is that if we do not change our political, °onomic
and social systems for the better, we are going to go down in history as a fallen

tion We cannot have the best policies and laws without a suitable government, elected hv
conscious and educated people Education, then, should be common to all, and the eople
should be rightly educated to be able to elect suitable rulers. Educated and able members
of assemblies should make laws and frame policies according to the true needs of the
country. Feudalism or the ”jagirdari” system should be brought to an immediate end
Agriculture should be revolutionized on modern lines. On top of everything, cheap
electricity, produced from water by erecting new dams across rivers, should be provided
to industry, agriculture and society at large. Oil should be searched on a massive scale
and it should be made available at low rates in all possible ways. Only by pursuing a
policy of national reconstruction on revolutionary lines shall we be in a position to raise
our heads as an independent nation without feeling the weights of outgoing loan
instalments and interest and incoming further loans and aid. Let us hope the new taxation
and economic policies will succeed. -~~ ,

46. Unemployment and Ways of Dealing With It

1 . The Introduction-Unemployment, a serious problem. Number of unemployed people

increasing (becoming more).

2. Increasing unemployment in different fields, in villages and cities.

3 . Causes of large-scale unemployment;

(i) Rapid increase in population, (ii) Slow progress of the country, (in) Migration of
village workers to cities.

4. Large-scale unemployment and less production.

5. The government should take steps to provide employment. Industrialists should expand
factories.

6. The Conclusion-Unemployment should be reduced to the minimum. Unemployment is

a serious problem not only for our country, but also for the advanced

countries. The number of educated as well as uneducated unemployed people is

increasing every year.

In our own country, we find increasing unemployment in different fields. Thousands of

B.A.s and M.A.s are idle as they cannot even get the jobs of clerks, ordinary office
workers and teachers. Thousands holding the B.Sc. and M.Sc. degrees cannot get jobs in
research laboratories, centres of scientific work, factories, and so on.

In our country (and in most other developing countries), we find hundreds of thousands
of unemployed labourers and farm workers in villages. The use of tractors and other
machines on farms has made a number of villagers idle. Otherwise, too, most villagers
are under-employed. They only work regularly and with effort when crops are being
sown or reaped (cut). For more than half of the year they do a little bit of work here and a
little bit there, and then sit idle.

h the cities we find many thousands of unemployed labourers and skilled workers. These
people do manual work (work by the hand), and generally earn daily wages. They are
often unemployed for days and weeks together.

The causes of this large-scale unemployment are many. Firstly, the population of our
Country and other developing countries is rising fast. Our population is increasing by a
fe\v lac each year. It becomes difficult to meet the needs of all the additional people.

\
The slow economic and scientific progress of the country is perhaps the greatest cause of
unemployment. Because of slow industrial development there are not very many large
factories and industrial centres where labourers, skilled \\orkers and fresh graduates can
get employed.

When machines are used on farms in villages many labourers and farmers become idie
Quite a few of them come to cities and the problem of unemployment here becomes
much more serious (acute).

Large-scale unemployment has serious effects on the country’s production Unemployed

people do not take part in its industrial or agricultural production.

The government should open new factories and industries at as mam places as possible I
Tnemployed labourers and skilled workers will be able to work there. There should be
more offices, scientific research centres, schools and colleges where our educated young

men and women can work.

Unemployed people should be ready to do all sorts of work: The students who cannot get
proper jobs after their studies are over should be ready to work manually in factories

and on farms.

Industrialists should expand their factories or set up new ones to provide work to a larger
number of people. Big landowner should cultivate more of their lands to provide work to
unemployed labourers and farmers. Small (cottage) industries should be set up in
villages. Increased industrial and agriculture production will cause an increase in the
exports and trade of the country. A large number of unemployed people will get busy with

export and trade. Unemployment should be reduced to the minimum level. It is necessary
for the progress

and prosperity of every nation.

47. Inflation or Rising Prices (P.U.)

1. The Introduction-What is inflation?

2. Causes of inflation:

(i) Increase (rise) in the demand for goods, supply of goods not increasing, (ii) General
rise in the standards of living of the people, (in) Increase in the supply of money, (iv)
Rise in prices on international markets.

3. Ways of reducing inflation:

(i) By increasing the production of goods, (ii) All countries and the UNO to act jointly.

(in) World population growth to be checked.

Inflation is there when the supply of money increases more than the supply of goods. It
means increase in money and prices that does not result in increased production of goods.

There are a number of causes of inflation or rising prices. Firstly, when people start using
different things more, their prices rise. Secondly, prices of different things rise if their
supply becomes less because of strikes of workers, closure of factories, floods,

absence of rainfall, and so on.

Another cause of inflation is the general rise in the standards of living of the people. AS
the people start living a better life with an increase in their incomes, they need more
clothes, shoes, and other things of daily use. They buy more luxury goods (for comfort
and enjoyment) like electric fans, heaters, radio and television sets, and so on. Education
becomes more common and people begin reading more newspapers, magazines arid
books. If production increases, the cost of production also rises because of the higher
wages of labourers and workers, higher prices of raw materials, and so on.

SO

The government is often forced to print more currency notes and increase the supply and

irculation of money in society. Then it can pay higher salaries, and wages to its \\orkers.

t if it cannot increase the production of different goods (as much as it increases the

nut if

supply of money), prices suddenly jump.

\ country may import raw materials for its factories. It may import machines and tools
and food items, fhe prices of all these may be high on world markets. They will then also
be hmh in the country importing them

In feet all countries should take joint steps to check inflation. The UNO and other world
aaencies should try to settle disputes bct\\ con t ountnes. There should be an atmosphere
of neace everywhere. Then countries and n.ition- \ II \\ork together to increase production
and keep prices at a proper level. They v\ill stop ^pcndlng their resources on preparations

lor war. The rise in world population should also be checked. It is difficult to raise the
production of different things as fast as the population is increasing It is necessary to
study all the causes of inflation. Then these causes should be removed

(or eliminated).

48. Agricultural Development in Pakistan

1. The Introduction-Agricultural and industrial development, both are necessary.

2. Agriculture-the base of the econom> (economic system).

^ Requirements-^) Our requirements of tood are increasing, (b) Most of our people i\nn
their living from agriculture, (c) Industry in the country depends upon agriculture, (d) i.
ommerce depends upon agriculture, (e) Agriculture - the base of our foreign trade.
4 1 lo\\ to develop our agriculture:

(a) By providing water where it is not available, (b) By removing water logging (the
water-level coming closer to the surface) and salinity (presence of the salts in the soil),
(c) By making our farmers use Modern methods of cultivation and machines on their
farms. (d) By reforming our system of agriculture, (e) By improving the system of
communications, telephone, telegraph and banks (the infrastructure).
5. The Conclusion-We should learn from the advanced countries new techniques of

agriculture.

In our country agricultural and industrial development are equally necessary. Agriculture
is the base of our economy. If cultivated properly, our lands can give us food grains like
wheat, rice, maize and barley much above our needs. We grow cotton of the first quality.
We can grow jute and perhaps tea in some parts of the country.

firstly, our requirements of food are increasing fast. With a rise in our population every
year, \ve i^ed more food. Then, with a rise in living standards the people buy greater

quantities of good.

Secondly, most of our people, above 70 per cent, earn their living from agriculture. Most
or our villagers are farmers or workers on the farms. If we develop our agriculture, they
W’H be prosperous (rich and happy) and their standards of living will improve.

Thirdly, a good deal of our industry and commerce depend upon agriculture. The cotton
actories use raw cotton and the sugar factories the sugar cane grown on farms. The
C1garette factories use raw tobacco. The paper mills use wood pulp and other raw
Materials. Then there are hundreds of biscuit factories using flour. The factories
producing ”ledicines use different forms of raw materials grown on farms or found in
forests. The a«ories producing vegetable ghee use different kinds of oil-seeds. Thus,
agriculture is the wsc of ’our industry.
Fourthly, commerce and business in the country depend a lot on agriculture. Traders are
engaged in bringing agricultural goods from farms and villages to markets and
commercial centres. Shopkeepers are busy selling food grain, flour, pulses etc. The trade
in raw materials sold to the factories is expanding.

Fifthly: agriculture is the base of our foreign trade. About 75 per cent of the goods
exported to other countries are agricultural raw materials. Thus cotton, rice, tobacco, salt
vegetables, and fruits are exported in large quantities bringing us a lot of foreign
exchange.

We should provide water to the farms that are dry during the greater part of the year This
can be done by building dams, digging canals and sinking tube-wells. As the same time,
efforts should be made to remove-water logging and salinity. (Water logging is there
when the underground water level rises and makes land unsuitable for cultivation.
Salinity is there when the salts of the earth collect around the roots of plants owing to
absence of water.)

Our farmers should use better seeds and fertilizers and medidines to kill insects. They
should mechanize fanning by using tractors, harvesters, bulldozers, tube-well engines,
power-pumps, and so on a large scale.

We should reform our agricultural system and remove its faults. We should try to make
our farmers independent owners of big pieces of land that will make them work more
efficiently.

We should improve our system of road and rail communications, telephone, telegraph and
bank facilities (the infrastructure) to expand our agriculture. There should be
wellconstructed roads between villages and cities and better arrangements to bring
agricultural produce from villages to markets on trucks and trains.

We should learn effective techniques of agriculture from the advanced countries in order
to modernize it.

49. Industrial Development in Pakistan

1. The Introduction-Industrial development is as much necessary as agricultural

development. No real progress without industry.

2. Why industrial development is so much necessary:

(a) Industries provide employment, (b) Industries are a support to agriculture, (c)
Industries increase the incomes of the people. Rising standards of living possible because
of industries, (d) Industries promote trade and commerce, (e) Industries promote foreign
trade, (f) Industries make the defences strong.

3. How to develop our industry;

(a) By setting up more steel mills, (b) By setting up heavy industry producing machines
used in factories, (c) By setting up factories producing spare parts of different machines,
(d) By increasing the number of factories producing exportable goods.

(The above point can be incorporated into the essay at the end.)

4. We should promote scientific education and research systematically and completely.

5. The Conclusion-Rapid and complete industrialization is the need of the hour.

Industrial development for our country is as much necessary as agricultural

development. We can be advanced and prosperous only if we industrialize our country

well like China and South Korea.

Industrial development is necessary for different reasons. F/rstJy, industries provide

employment to the people. Most of the unemployed people can get employed in newly
opened factories and manufacturing centres as labourers, technicians and workers of

Writing

207

arious categories. Further, as we mechanize our farming the idle agricultural labourers
and farmers will be able to work regularly in industrial establishments in villages or
cities.

Secondly, we can modernize our agriculture on sound lines only if we have well-

stablished industries. We need tractors, harvesters, threshers, bulldozers, tube-well

engines, and so on to mechanize our farming. Then we need spare parts for these

machines to run them properly. We need a great many factories producing all these

machines and their spares. We need more factories producing fertilizers.

Thirdly, with rapid industrialization, more and more people get employed in factories at
proper wages and salaries. The general standards of living rise as people buy and use
different kinds of factory-made (mass produced) goods like transistors, radio and
television sets, electric fans, fine cloth and so on.

Fourthly, industries promote trade and commerce. Traders, dealers, shopkeepers and
labourers bring goods from factories to wholesale or retail shops. Banks also do a lot of
business by keeping the money of industrialists and traders and by giving them loans.
There is greater circulation of money and the economy expands.
Fifthly, industries promote foreign trade. Now we export big quantities of industrial
products. For example, we export cotton and woollen cloth, cement, cigarettes,
medicines, shoes, sports goods, electric fans, surgical instruments, and so on produced in
our factories. We can manufacture scooters, motorcycles, cars, tractors, refrigerators,
airconditioners, etc., for use in the country as well as for export.

Sixthly, industries are necessary for our defence. As soon as possible, we should begin
producing military trucks, tanks, warplanes, submarines, and so on. For this we shall have
to develop the iron and steel industry on the most Modern lines.

We should think seriously about the ways of becoming an industrial power. We should

promote scientific education and research in a systematic and complete way. We need

good scientists or men of science to invent new machines and industrial processes. We

need them to help industrial experts to set up and run different industries.

We should establish small-scale (cottage) industries in our villages. Heavy and medium-

scale industries can be set up at the seaports, in the cities and industrial centres. The

setting up of the Karachi Steel Mills and the Taxila Heavy Industries Complex should be

the beginning of the complex but necessary process of industrialization. Rapid and
complete industrialization will remove the dark clouds of poverty

surrounding us. It will bring us glory and power.

50. The Kalabagh Dam

1- The Introduction-The need to have more dams on our rivers. Site and size of the

Kalabagh dam.

2. Benefits and negative results of the Kalabagh dam.

3- The need for the dam construction with a balanced approach.

4. The Conclusion-We may offer to construct other dams at other places besides the

Kalabagh dam. The Kalabagh dam may be raised after getting the consent of the Frontier

province.
After the successful construction and launching of the giant Tarbela and Mangla darns the
nation enjoyed the fruits in the form of irrigation of vast areas of dry land and use of
cheap electricity. But, owing to political and economic disturbances, instability (absence
°f firmness and continuity) of governments and the illiteracy of our masses the erection
of other big dams across our rivers could not be undertaken (taken up). It is surprising
and also shocking that the plans for the construction of the Kalabagh Dam had been
under
discussion since the 1960s and several maps, charts and blueprints (photographic copies
of plans) had been prepared with the collaboration (working together) of foreign agencies
and experts at high costs. yet no final decision could be reached in favour of or against its
construction. Surprisingly and shockingly indeed no other plans for the construction of
dams equal or bigger in size than that of the Kalabagh dam were made or considered. For
the Kalabagh dam is not the end of the story of dam building in Pakistan. We would
surely need more dams than one of its kind, and for that purpose another huge dam could
be constructed if for the present national consensus (general agreement) on the
construction of the Kalabagh dam could not be reached.

In the past years we have experienced \vater shortages, decline in food production and
cash crops (crops for sale and not for use b\ the grower like the cotton crop), massive
import of food grains and unbearable rise in the rates of electricity in the 1990s, and in
later years too. This led us to think seriouslv in terms of construction of the Kalabagh
dam.

The Kalabagh dam is proposed to be built across the Indus about 120 miles southwest of
Islamabad, some 16 miles from the Soan River. The height of the dam is proposed to be
916 feet while the height of Nowshera and surrounding areas is 942 feet. So, according to
several experts, there will not be any danger of the dam water overflowing into the
surroundings. (Though of course the danger of the dam water logging or causing the
water level under the earth to rise considerably cannot be ruled out.) Some critics say that
the dam may cause floods by the overflow of water in the rainy season. However, other
critics say that floods have been around without the dam being in existence.

The Kalabagh dam, according to the plans, will have a height of 11000 feet and its lake
will cover an area of 164 square miles. As a multi-purpose project it will, firstly, provide
cheap hydroelectric power (electricity produced from water energy). Joined with the
Tarbela Dam resources, the two dams will generate (produce) tremendous electricity for
industrial, commercial and domestic purposes. Thermal pouer production (that is, with
coal, gas and oil) will not be needed and the imports of oil for this purpose will almost
end, and the country will be able to save sizeable foreign exchange,

Secondly, the grand (though, according to our logic, there could be other grandiose
alternative dams as Kalabagh can never be the end of the dam construction story in
Pakistan). The Kalabagh Dam could guarantee the supply of plenty of water from its
reservoirs to the network of canals even during the dry season. This will increase food
production to new heights and may turn the country into a food exporter.

The first major objection to the construction of the dam is, to repeat, is the alleged
(asserted without definite proof) possibility of flooding of Nowshera and surrounding
jreas by its water. The second objection is that the dam would waterlog the agricultural
ands of Swabi, Mardan, Pabli and Nowshera. The supporters of the dam say that the ^ater
level of the lake of the dam will be 50 to 100 feet below the heights of these cities, fhe
water of the dam, then, will not be able to cause water logging. But we think that, in nv
case, water vvill seep (pass through small openings or pores) into nearby lands causing
certain degree of water loggn.g. And salinity (the collection of additional salts in the arth)
may also accompany water logging. But. then, large areas of our land in the Punjab id
Sindh are already going waste near the canals which are almost everywhere. So, we lall
have to find some scientific and agricultural solutions on a national basis to these vin
problems when the Kalabagh, or any other magnanimous (grand) dam for that atter,
begins to spread its water logging and salinity curses.

UUnting

209

The third main objection is that, as a result of the construction of the dam, many usands
of acres of cultivable land will come under water and thousands of people will dislocated
in the Frontier Province and in the Punjab. When the country is already onljcally in
distress, how will new villages be brought into being and how will so any families be
provided jobs and work? The answer from the other side across the table
• that the Frontier and the Punjab provinces vvill have far more cultivable land, and their
’ncreased farm products will reach all comers of the country and even abroad. For the
t’me being, aid and loans will help settle the displaced people from the dam areas. And,
then. witn better and more land in their possession and in new modern villages, the
displaced people will be able to open new chapters of their lives with more money and
better facilities. When dams of such dimensions and reserves are constructed anywhere in
the world, problems of settling displaced populations in new areas always arise. America
and China, besides other countries of South America and Africa, have solved such
problems for the greater good and in the larger interests of the nation. But, it is also very
important to develop national unity and achieve agreement and an atmosphere of
democratic equality before we decide to introduce a programme of dam construction that
is sure to disturb one province more than the other and when the history of the country is
a witness to exploitation (selfish use) of the greater part of the population by the powerful
and the rich. The rulers have not been as selfless and nationalistic as they should have
been resulting in the loss of faith in them by the common people who, by and large, are
ignorant, but highly patriotic.

The fourth main objection to the Kalabagh dam construction is from certain politicians
\\ho say that it will result in the availability of less water in Sindh as more will be utilized
by the Punjab. This objection is met by others who say that already in 1991 the Indus
river water has been apportioned between the provinces through an accord (agreement),
and Sindh will continue to receive its settled share of the water.

In the ultimate (final) analysis, as discussed above, our politicians, leaders, policymakers
and experts should have alternative schemes of mega (large) or mini dam construction in
different provinces. These schemes should be implemented (put into effect) one after
another as and when all the provinces agree on the implementation. To have a sole (only
one) dam in the picture, and only in one province is like asking a father <o put the weight
of the family on the shoulders of one son out of four. When the father asks the four sons
to take the share In mutual agreement or in proportion, there cannot of course be any
objection or resentment (bitter feeling). Now, when the mistake of not planning for the
whole nation has aeen committed, some such way is to be found as to construct the
Kalabagh Dam after convincing the ’burdened’ son or of offering other dams at other
places at the same time

51. The Motorway-M2

’ • The Introduction-The unite of the motorway and its description. ”• The causes of the
construction ot the motorway.
3- The results of the motorwav ”s construction. •*• Should other motorwav be
constructed? ->• The Conclusion- The future of the motorway and other roads in
Pakistan.

Tlie motorway from Lahore to Islamabad and back is a 6-lane road which makes it 3lanes
on each side. The distance is about 360 kilometres, about 50 kilometres more than tne
G.T. Road between the two cities The lanes are quite broad for heavy vehicular traffic,
but not so much as tojustilv its comparison with the world’s best motorways. But.
as this essay will make it clear, even this motorway is a luxury in a poor country whose
most of the roads in the smaller towns and cities are in wretched condition. And, the
villages and towns whose roads or paths to the main city markets are broken like those of
the Czarist Russia before the Russian Revolution had a prior right to suitable roads.

Now, we come to the motorway journey from Lahore to Islamabad and back in a car or
on a bus. The motorway takes its start from 17 KM before the Lahore toll plaza and starts
in the direction of Sheikhupura. We reach the Gujranwala-Sheikhupura interchange (a
system of smaller roads by which two or main roads are connected) about 30 kilometres
away in a few minutes. The next interchange is that of Pindi Bhattian/Hafizabad from
where roads to Chiniot, Gujranwala and Sargodha branch off. Soon the passengers have
the pleasant experience of crossing the Chenab. After the river our eyes catch the
beautiful sight of green and yellow, brownish and grayish fields with crops of different
kinds. The fruit trees in and around the fields add to the charms of Nature. As we
approach the Kot Momin interchange, we feel the burden of travel getting light in the
fresh garden air of the place. Roads towards Sargodha and Kharian branch off from here.

Passing through the Salam Chowk interchange we reach the Bhera service station. Bhera
provides a shopping and telephone facility at the service station and also a restaurant
where passengers can have food and cold drinks. After crossing the Jhelum we reach
rather hurriedly the salt mountain range before Kallar Kahar which brakes the running
vehicles giving them a dragging speed. The zigzag twisting and serpentine (winding) six
roads side by side rising and declining between dry and high stone rocks and hills cause a
sizeable loss of time. Very much of the time gained in the earlier part of the journey is
lost along the 10-15 kilometre tiresome and painful part of the journey.

After Kallar Kahar at KM 241, the journey is smooth, pleasant and comfortable. We
reach the terminus (final point) of the motorway at the Peshawar Road in Islamabad after
a normal journey of about 5-6 hours and an expense of the toll tax. Because of less jerks
and jumps we feel less tired than on the G.T. Road. But, surprisingly, the time thus saved
is not much and the oil consumed is perhaps greater because at the speed of 100-120 km
per hour a vehicle needs more of it than at lower speeds.

The motorway was planned and constructed basically to activate , commercial and
industrial activity in a sagging (sinking) economy. Firstly, it was supposed to facilitate
the Afghan and central Asian transit trade. It was thought that the central Asian states
(formerly part of the Soviet Union) and Afghanistan would receive their goods from
Karachi and Gwadar through the motorway and export their products from the Arabian
seaport of Karachi. However, because of the prolonged Afghan war this could not
happen. And, the ready use of M-2 (between Islamabad and Lahore) also depended upon
the construction of the motorway between Islamabad and Peshawar. This construction in
itself will not serve a ready purpose because of the Afghan war and perhaps, more than
that even, the economic and political interests of Iran and other bordering states running
contrary to those of Pakistan.
Secondly, the motorway was designed to promote industrialization on both its sides.
Industrial zones were planned to be established. The socio-economic background of the.
areas around the motorway was not seriously taken into account (given serious
consideration) by the planners. The villages on both sides of the motorway are inhabited
mostly by uneducated, untrained and uncultured people. These people do not have the
capacity to operate modern (or sophisticated) machines in factories and industrial
production centres. The electricity being so very expensive, it is very difficult to set Up

llf

UJnting

211

CSJ-.

v industries, and especially when hundreds of industrial units across the country from K.
racni to the northern areas are lying idle. On top of all, the law and order situation, with
he unending series of killings, dacoities and other terrorist acts, repels local and foreign
• vestment. The economic scenario (the whole scene with future possibilities) does not mt
to any foreseeable possibility of rapid economic activity in the vicinity (nearby
surroundings) of the motorway.

Thirdly, the motorway was supposed to function as the main route for the carriage of

onlmercial goods and transit of passengers possibly replacing the GT Road. The most

bvious (clear) fact that the motorway had a limited scope or capacity to absorb fast and

heavy traffic was conveniently overlooked. If the floodgates of traffic from the central

Asian states and Afghanistan were fully opened, the motorway would be crowded

throwing most of the local traffic out. In the ultimate analysis, in view of its
constructional

defects, especially around Kallar Kahar, its weak foundations and limited capacity, it

would not be able to stand the load of heavy vehicular traffic from several countries plus

that of our own country.

A much better alternative to road construction or planning for better communications

would have been to better the condition of the already existing roads. The GT Road
should have been modernized with the addition of one or two or more lanes. The Indus
highway should have been broadened through its length and breath. The roads or paths
connecting village markets to towns and cities should have been re-constructed or
constructed anew. The railways should have been attended to, and one more railway track
should have been added wherever one track was available. The whole railways should
have been modernized which would have given an unimaginable (unthinkable) boost to
all our commercial and industrial activity.

The motorway of today was not needed as such according to the list of our priorities
(objects needed to be achieved before others). The turn of the motorway was to have
come after substantial (large enough) commercialization, industrialization and, more
importantly, after education and training of the masses (common people) on modern
lines. The money for the construction of the motorway, and much more than it, should
have been in our pockets, and more money from developed resources should have been
flowing into them than we spent on this project.

to fact, the whole infrastructure (system or structures necessary for the operation of a
country) of roads, railways, and air traffic should have been put in order, and that would
nave been enough. Now, with many of the other roads and railways out of order or out of
hill operation, the likelihood (possibility) of the motorway defeating the purposes of its
construction cannot be ruled out (excluded from our consideration).
52. The Place of Women in our Society

• The Introduction-Women in society are as important as men.

• The position of women in the villages and cities.

3 Tu ••

ine position of women in some other countries.

• We should give enough chances to our women to work and progress. They should ^ave
a better status.

• vJur women and the development (progress) of the country. j ^ut women should never
forget their basic duties.

rhe Conclusion-We should give the rightful place to our women, omen in society are as
important as men. In fact, both men and women make it for society to exist and progress.
212

12 B.fl. English Simple Grammar 61 Composition

The position of women in our society is, on the whole, not very satisfactory. Most of our
women living in the villages are uneducated and uncultured like the village men. They do
not have many of the rights which men enjoy in village society. Very few women enjoy
independent positions as owners of land or property. They depend on their husbands or
other men looking after their families. Women in the villages cannot often marry as they

like. Women in the cities are in a somewhat better position. Some of them can, of course,
get

educated and can marry after their choice. But women in poor families like those of
labourers or wage earners live like village women. Most of them work hard in their small,
dirty houses, serve their husbands and take care if their children and live in quite a

helpless condition.

Married women mostly depend on their husbands in all important matters of life. If they
try to have their will in these, their husbands generally oppose them and there are quarrels
and disputes. These disputes sometimes end in divorce.

hi the advanced countries like Japan, France, Britain, Germany and America women
enjoy a very respectable position. They are treated equal with men in almost every field
of life. They can freely receive education like men. In the villages there, women own and
control their properties and lands even independent of their husbands or the male
members of their families. In the cities women can work in most professions side by side
with men. They can have their will in some important matters of life like buying or
selling houses, deciding about the careers of their children, etc.

We should give enough chances to our women to work in different fields of life. Village
women should find it easy to work on village farms with men. Chances should be given
to village women to come to cities to study or to learn practical skills of doing
agricultural or industrial work. They should be free to marry as they like.

There should be more scope for our women to work in some professions like teaching,
social welfare and medicine. Here women can work in as good a way as men. Some
special professions for women like nursing can be reformed a great deal.

Yet it is necessary for our women to take special care of their homes, husbands and
children. The first duty of every woman is to look after her family. We should give the
right place to our woman in society. Only then can we make proper

progress as a nation.
53. Working Women (Careers for Women)

Women form about half of our population, and they are active members of society, yet we
have not succeeded in according (giving or granting) the position or status they deserve.
There is immediate need to associate our women with all the major developmental
activities in our society commensurate with (in proportion to) their ability

and capacity.

1 ct us consider at the start what our women need to be able to work apart from or side b\
side \\ith men in different professions. Firstly, almost all women should be educated to
different levels. Education up to Intermediate is quite necessary, both for our men and
women. Now, since the drastic (sudden and big) fall in our educational standards
education up to Matriculation seems to be inadequate (insufficient). What a pity the
majority of our people are uneducated, and so unfit for most jobs in society! Secondly, the
old traditions and tomentions (practices or customs) barring women from outside \\orK
\\ill ha\e to be abolished. No doubt the purdah (veil) system is no more so popular, but .
j-.:- ,x(- L,.,-r,ino women confined (restricted) to the home are quite alive, ’”

213

£SSov Writing

villages and small towns and the underdeveloped parts (slums) of our cities. These

traditions are mostly based on our backwardness, ignorance and faulty upbringing and

training- Thirdly, we have to reduce the dependence of the whole family on the male
head.

This can be done if the mature, responsible women in the family decide to work with men

outside or in institutions for them alone. Mow, what professions or vocations would suit
women who are in a position to work

independently or in the company of the members of their family? The answer to this
nuestion depends on the general physical capacities and social circumstances of the
\vonien. Firstly, according to our observation, the teaching profession is the most suitable
for women. At the school-level female teachers can provide motherly love and attention
to children and can teach comparatively more devotedly than men. Psychologically, a
woman can perhaps understand better the natures, habits and needs of children. At
college and university levels, too, a woman can teach perhaps as effectively as men. She
has the added advantage of long holidays and short teaching hours which means less
physical and mental strain (or burden) on her physique.

Secondly, the nursing and airline hostesses’ professions and the like are more suitable for
women. Here womanly attention, care and service are needed which men cannot

provide so well.

Thirdly, with the expansion of commerce, there is a growing demand for sales women
and office clerks, secretaries and managers. Thousands of women can be usefully
employed in these capacities to the satisfaction of traders as well as customers.

Fourthly, with administrative expansion on the government and non-government level,

more and more women can be gainfully employed as clerks, secretaries and officers in
various capacities. Though the working hours in offices are long, lonely women like
widows, divorcees and childless wives can work here without disturbing their homely
routines much. Or, husbands and wives together can decide to work in offices adjusting
the working hours with each other.

Fifthly, women are very suitably performing work in garment, handicraft and toy
factories and factories producing jams, cold drinks, bread, etc, at home or outside the
home. They can stitch cloths well, help in shoe-making, and can work at ease and with
Merest in fields of their choice like those of cosmetics production, designing clothes and
^oes, painting and engraving. Women are naturally interested in these activities and
others allied (connected) with these like the processes of packing, labelling and despatch
°f products. If export is also involved, the additional correspondence can also be

Performed by women.

Sixthly, the medical profession needs the services of more and more of female doctors to
attend to the female population, children and generally to men as well.

Professions demanding strenuous work and labour and long working hours like those of
engineers, technicians, factory workers, daily labourers or masons are definitely not so
m«ch suited to women.

All would agree that when it comes to attending to one’s children, household duties like

°oking and washing clothes or looking aftej the house, a woman had better not work f
ts’de if she does not have other helpers at home. If a husband can earn enough for the

mi’v and has young children, a woman should avoid working for money. ! 54. The
Choice of a Profession or Vocation (P.U.)

., «e Introduction-Different professions in society. We should choose a profession

very carefully.
214 Bfl Snglish Simple Grammar 61 CompOslt

3. We should like the profession we choose.

4. Educational institutions should help us in choosing different professions.

5. A person joining a profession should have the necessary ability.

6. The Conclusion-All professions are good in their own right.

We have different .professions for educated people like the medical, engineering, w and
teaching professions. Different kinds of government service and service in the arrni
forces and the police are also some of the main professions.

We should choose a profession very carefully. Students should select their subjects f
studies after careful thought to enter professions really suited to them. If they do not stud
for professions suited’to them, they may have to leave them to study for others. Some of
them may not be able to adopt any profession in a permanent way.

Firstly, a student should have a natural desire to work for it and should be interested m it.
He should not think of joining it only because others think high of it or are earning a lot
of money in it.

Our colleges and universities should guide us in the selection of our subjects and
professions. Students joining a college or university should be able to learn the details of
different subjects from teachers and experts. Teachers should advise students about the
utility (usefulness) of those subjects as they know about the tastes, likes and capacities of
their students.

There should be enough jobs for students entering different professions. In fact the
government should make arrangements for all manner of students who have to earn
money after the completion of their studies. The government and the people should
cooperate and provide work and jobs to students preparing for different professions.
Students of the sciences like physics, chemistry and biology should be able to get work
and jobs of engineers, doctors, scientists and teachers just after getting their highest
degrees. So students of the arts like literature, political science and economics should be
able to get jobs of teachers, office workers, administrators, and so on.

A student should have the necessary ability for the profession he likes to join. He should
learn his subjects well. For example, a student desirous of joining the engineering
profession should learn about it all that he can.”He should have enough theoretical and
practical knowledge of the branch of engineering (civil, mechanical, electrical, etc.)
which he wants to adopt (take up). ”Professional knowledge” is necessary for those who
want to succeed in any profession.

All professions are good in their own right. One who works properly and well in a
profession is ”successful” in life.

55. Sectarianism in Pakistan

1. The Introduction-The meaning of sectarianism in the context of our society.

2. Brief history of sectarianism here.

3. Results of its existence in different parts of the country.

4. How can sectarianism be controlled and channelized for better purposes.

5. The Conclusion-Sectarianism and the progress and welfare of the whole society.
Sectarianism comes from ”sectarian” which in its turn, comes from ”sect” ”Sectarian •

then, means concerning or about a sect. A sect is a part)’ or group within a religious bod)’
We can see for ourselves how the people, mainly Muslims, in the country are divided m
so many sects, the broadest being those of the Sunnis and Shias, and then sub-sects
Sipah-e-Sahaba, Sipeh-e-Muhammadi, the Barelvi, Deobandi and so on.

Writing

It has rightly been said that Pakistan is a state of multi-culture, multi-ethnic and
multisect/sub-sect.” Starting from the two main sects of the Sunnis and Shias now we
have several sub-sects like Anjuman-e-Sipah-e-Sahaba, Sipah-e-Muhammadi, Deobandi
and Barelvi. These sects are in silent or open conflict most of the time.

Historically, until the 1970s, the Sunnis and Shias, despite their differences, violently
opposed the Qadianis. The Qadianis’ sect was very small or negligible when it was
declared non-Muslim in 1974 by an act of Parliament. Thereafter the differences between
the Sunnis and Shias began surfacing prominently. A series of disturbances, killings and
terrorist acts based upon these differences were witnessed in Lahore, Rawalpindi, Jhang,
Islamabad, Jacobabad and elsewhere. The successful Iranian revolution encouraged the
Shiite groups to struggle against the Sunni groups. The Sipah-i-Sahaba (of the Sunnis)
and the Sipah-i-Muhammadi (of the Shias), are the prime sectarian parties, engaged in
fighting and terrorizing each other.

The causes of the sectarian conflicts and fighting are political, economic and social.
firstly, the religio-political parties like the Jamaat-e-Islami, Jamiat-Ulema-i-Islam and the
recent Islami ”tehriks” (movements) and organizations, could not get enough votes in the
successive general elections to be in any kind of controlling position to check the growth
and dangers of sectarianism. Failure at the ballot box affected their acceptability to the
people quite badly. However weighty and moral their techniques and directions to the
people and the sectarian militant groups might be, their appeal and force were limited.

Secondly, perhaps the greatest cause of the sectarian conflicts is the general illiteracy and
backwardness of our people. The ignorant masses are misled by the sectarian parties into
channels of hatred, conflicts and fighting through false propaganda. The general
illiteracy, especially in the rural (village) areas, is because of the feudal (”jagirdari”)
system. The overall backwardness of the people is the result of inefficiency and
corruption in politics and inability of the members of Parliament to discuss intelligently
ways of betterment of the society and to frame suitable policies and laws.

Thirdly, the failure of successive governments to revolutionize agriculture, industrialize

the country on modern lines, lay a strong scientific and technological base and produce
electricity at cheep rates resulted in sluggish production. The industrial goods produced
were mostly of inferior quality, and so were not easily exportable. Except for some major
crops like rice and surplus food items like sugar at times, fruits in minor quantities and
the traditional sports and leather goods and handicrafts, cotton garments and the like not
much was available to export. There was rising unemployment, inflation and economic
inequality with the result that many idle and jobless people flocked around or listened to
the sectarian parties. Quite a few became their servants or agents, and after getting
training and arms began operating as terrorists in the name of religion.

fourthly, the operation of foreign agents and spies inside the country became much easier
in an atmosphere of corruption, economic and social disorder and political uncertainties.
These powers managed to arrange bomb explosions, firing on civilians and c°rnmission
of other terrorist acts in order to weaken Pakistan and to attain their own objectives
(aims).

’fthly^ the Afghanistan situation directly and indirectly contributed to the ugly sectarian

1 Cation. Volunteers returning from the Afghan freedom war with weapons were free to

p’”. e sectarian party of their choice. The Kashmir situation made India send terrorists to

’Stan to pose as supporters of the sectarian parties and to operate on their behalf. The
216 Bfi enghsh S.mple Grommor 6. CompOsitlOn

steps taken by the government to maintain law and order and peace are necessary ail(j
desirable. But, for a long-term peace, the causes of the disorder need to be removed.

The solution to the sectarian situation in Pakistan lies in the removal of the main cause
for it. For this purpose, education of the masses on the right lines is the first essential
Then the break-up of the feudal system forever is unavoidable. The economic policies of
the government will have to be streamlined to meet all the current and future demands of
the people. Lastly, the members of Parliament, when replaced by truly educated and
sensible ones, will have to frame laws for the improvement of economic, political and
social life. Sectarian groups will, then, find it difficult to disrupt peace and foreign
intervention or interference in our affairs will come to an end.

It is the need of the hour to check and crush sectarianism, but better by reforms and
changes in the economic and social system of the country.

56. Ethnicity in Pakistan

1. The Introduction-The meaning of ethnicity in the context of our society.

2. Brief history of ethnicity here.

3. Results of the existence of ethnicity in different parts of the country.

4. How we can control ethnicity and use the forces behind it for better purposes.

5. The Conclusion-The progress and welfare of the whole society and sectarianism.
Ethnicity comes from ethnic which means ”of a racial or tribal group.” So, ethnicity is a

racial or tribal feeling and desire to stay within the race or tribe to which one belongs. It
also gives paramount importance to language. We can see for ourselves how much strong
ethnic feelings are in almost every corner of Pakistan. The uneducated and uncultured
Balochis, Pathans, Sindhis and Punjabis very often think in terms of their races, castes
and tribes or clans (large families or groups of related people), and not in terms of the
whole country or nation. Some strong parties and individuals in the four provinces have
been active on strong ethnic lines. ;

Islam means submission to God, and all Muslims are expected to obey Him in the samv
way. The whole Muslim community or ”ummah” is expected to be one in its religious
life. Therefore, Islam does not favour the division of Muslims into racial groups or sects
or social divisions on linguistic basis. Let us see how ethnicity and, sectarianism have
harmed us in our political, social, economic and national life.

Firstly, extreme ethnic groups limit their attachment or devotion to themselves. They
begin thinking, without any real basis, that they are superior to all other groups or
communities, hi Sindh the MQM in the cities and the Sindhi nationals in the villages
were two prominent ethnic groups in conflict with each other. The Pashtuns in the
Frontier province form one strong ethnic group, but fortunately, most of them are not so
much in conflict with the other ethnic groups of Pathans. The Saraikis around Multan
form another powerful ethnic group. The Pashtun, the Balochi and the Brahui are the
ethnic groups in Balochistan with their own social attitudes and policies.

We know how large ethnic groups fought in Yugoslavia driving the country to virtual (in
fact almost complete) destruction. In Rawanda, the Hutu and Tutsi people fought in the
1990s killing and dislocating millions of people. In the US, the long conflict between the
whites and the blacks caused large-scale killings and destruction almost over the whole
country. In Pakistan Karachi and the interior Sindh have been the main theatres ot ethnic
violence and disturbances crippling (damaging and wakening seriously) industry/
commerce, education and administration. The ethnic havoc (widespread damage an<J

6ssov Writing

disorder) luckily did not travel to other parts of country so much because of the absence
of

strong and organized ethnic political parties and organizations in the rest of the country.

The greatest ethnic group in terms of money and landed estates is the feudal r’iagirdari”)
class. Vast and spread all over the country, it has been regularized or ’ titutionalized
natjonajiy jt has been ruling the country through Parliament and has been crushing the
total population except the industrial lords, rich merchants, powerful civil servants and
military commanders. It is one in its aims and purposes and is not in conflict within or
without. In any case, its existence has damaged and almost destroyed the social fabric
whose major part is the villages and small towns. Its replacement by the middle class that
is made up of sensible hardworking people and intellectuals is a must for ’ the
survival, continuity and progress of the society.

Ethnicity in Pakistan holds out many dangers like the iceberg in the ocean. The ethnic
violence in Karachi and Sindh can be the tip of the iceberg (a danger sign), the greater
dangers lie in its further escalation (increase or development). Ethnic disturbances have

already set in (started) in the Punjab.

In order to avoid a Somalia-like situation where ethnic fighting reached its peak in the
1990s, we should implement active and sensible plans for national development. The
break-up of feudalism should go hand in hand with universal education. We should gear
up our industrial and agricultural development that includes the construction of suitable
dams and activating our closed industry and setting up new factories. Then national
integration will be more possible with a sound industrial base. The developments in
Malaysia and South Africa can be studied that led to sectarian harmony and peace. Lastly,
a general and basic kind of religious education should be provided through the mass
media (the radio, TV and the press) and in schools and colleges which can negatives the
effects of ethnicity in some ways instead of accentuating (making more forceful) it in any
way. For (because) it is a fact that those who do not or cannot attach themselves to
religion or a very healthy national outlook can easily embrace some ethnic interests.

57. Terrorism and Bomb Blasts

1. The Introduction-What terrorism means.

2. Terrorism is an organized activity.

3. Ho\\ terrorist organizations work.

4. How terrorism may be checked.

(Terrorism means use of force and threats against persons, groups or governments for

political or other purposes. Terrorism is not a modern activity. Huodteds-of-years-age

socieiieiavere not tre~>organized~as ihey-are today with Modern, .facilities -of jtoads*.

telephone, regular police force, and seonrFhcrrrreads of strong groups of people,

rebbe*s~

: of force andlhreats to life and property.

* -*--- -4, , TVltlt-ja <T|f>

arriofs-made-use of iwee ari-treas .

kNow. terrorism itself is quite an organized acti\ ity. There are terrorist organizations or
societies that train terrorists for their purposes. Sometimes these organizations are
supported by foreign governments. The most devastating (ruinous) international terrorist
actions of this century until now were the 11 September 200 i aerial attacks on the World
Trade Centre in New York, the Pentagon in Washington and the plane crash in
Pennsylvania. Thousands of people from America and other countries were killed and
property worth billions of dollars was destroyed. All this caused huge economic losses to
our and other countries, immediate suffering to the Afghans and a war situation in South
Asia.

1
18

8.H. Cnglisn bimple orommor 01 Composition

essay

Firstly, a tegular terrortsT organization usually works-against the government. It tries to

amage essential government -buildings, offices and public places like trade centres,
airway stations and airports” with-bombs andjiestructive-weapons.piis sets the people
gainst the government and causes public demonstrations. The bomb blasts and the
ssulting deaths and destruction are an example of such terrorism. v

A terrorist organization operating in a country usually gets money and weapons for
oreign governments to promote state terrorism. It also joins hands with forceful groups or
arties opposed to the government inside the country. v^--

Secondly, nattomror^g-CDmmurritiesTvithin a country use terrorist methods to gain

reater freedom or independence’. Thus the Sikhs in India have been committing acts of
;rrorism to achieve self-rule in the Punjab. The Irish people in North Ireland have been
;rromiftg4H-Brittsh-fovenHnent’to-ft>rceirto grant 4hem independence. Thirdly, there are
internal or international terrorists like Carlos in the past who actively ijack planes or
kidnap (take away unlawfully) important or rich persons. They demand uge amounts of
money for the release of prisoners or some political concessions for the :turn of the
aeroplanes, passengers or the kidnapped persons. Air hijackings have been uite common.
vO. ’ (f

The causes of terrorism in different parts of the world should be removed on emergency
asis with the help of the world powers and the UN. ^Fhe-ehiefeauses-are injustices done )
_lh@-J*alestin4ans mOhe» Middle, East, to the people of Kashmir in South Asia, to the
Iheeherrs in South Russia and to the poor people of the Third World in east, west, south
nd north. ^ ,** ^ ^^/r >

Terrorism needs to be checked very carefully. The different governments should force
11 the people illegally present in their countries to leave. They should force the refugees )
remain in their camps all the time. They should arrange to stop the illegal flow of arms nd
money into the countries from abroad (other countries). They should have effective ;cret
services which can report all kinds of terrorist plans. They ma> help the UN to stablish a
special anti-terrorist force. The deployment (tactical use) of the police or the rmy on a
large scale can be discussed in newspapers, on the radio and TV (the mass icdia) and in
the elected assemblies.

58. Terrorism in the United States of America

Terrorism in the US has a history. As early as 1920, a bomb exploded in the Wall Street
he main financial district), New York, killing 40 people. In 1970, a student was killed in
bomb attack in the Madison University by the American Anarchists (those who want a
auntry without any government). From 1975 to 1978, many people were killed in a New
’ork bar (a place where wines are served). In 1993, a massive car-bomb explosion killed
:veral people and damaged the famous World Trade Centre In I90«,an \merican killed id
injured hundreds in Oklahoma. In 1998, some anti-modernist Americans killed and ijured
many through parcel bombings. The September 2001 terrorist attacks in the US ’ere the
most massive and destructive.

On September 11, terrorists on two US planes crashed into the World Trade Centre (the
/TO) in New York, the third plane crashed into the Pentagon (the Department of ’efence)
in Virginia and the fourth that was heading for the White House in Washington •ashed in
the fields. The terrorists were killed together with hundreds of passengers and ie crew
(pilots and workers) and the people in the buildings. Upwards of ten thousand :ople were
killed in the World Trade Centre alone. The twin-towered 110-storeyed /TO was razed
(levelled) to the ground, and even fire fighters and rescuers lost their

lives in the hundreds. By all means, it was an act of organized terrorism and large-scale

destruction.

\Vhoever may be the terrorists who caused the massive loss of lives and destruction of
operty over the years in the US, they and their companions had developed hatred and
enmity for the US government and its policies. Quite a few people in the US are
dissatisfied with the pattern of their social lives or their inner lives or they are agents of
foreign agencies that they decide to use force against their fellow citizens or the
government in utter (complete) hopelessness. To us in the Far East, the greatest cause of
terrorism in America and in places with American presence is the continuous support of
the Amer’can government of Israeli destructive policies in the Middle East. Then despite
its power and influence over the UNO and other world organizations, the US has not
helped positively and forcefully in the solution of the Kashmir problem in this part of the
world. The American government did not take a lesson from its blind and fruitless help to
the Shah of Iran in the twentieth century that made the Iranian people rise in revolt
against their government. Her siding with unpopular South American and African
dictatorships and harmful governments in our country in the earlier years of our history
developed hatred in the common citizens against the US. Far better it would have been
for the Americans to befriend the common people of Asia, Africa and South America by
helping them to have true democracies and people-friendly governments. Through
such governments they could have provided educational and health facilities and
programmes for rapid economic and social development to the common people. The US
should not have propped (supported) the rich, monarchical and dictatorial regimes (social
and political systems), for example, of Saudi Arabia, Jordan and the United Arab
Emirates for oil and defence benefits. Instead, it should have tried to bring the
governments round to the education of the masses (common people) to high levels and to
introduce democracy, equality and justice in the true sense.

As a result of the twisted and short-sighted policies of the US, the gaps between the
educational, technological and intellectual levels of the American and European societies
and the levels of the developing or under-developed societies went on widening. At the
turn of the century, the dissatisfaction reached the boiling point, and there were groups,
agencies, societies, associations and mini-governments in different countries including
America that were ready to smash and demolish the signs of supremacy of the US
symbolically as a warning. The destruction of the majestic buildings and the killing of the
citizens of the superpower on a large scale is, then, a reaction against its programmes and
policies that, unluckily, have promoted inequality, injustice and restlessness in different

parts of the world.

The results of the recent waves of terrorism in the US, naturally, were devastating (very
destructive) for it as well as for the rest of the world. Trade, industry and daily work in
public places slowed down in all America. Economic activity in the advanced parts of the
world suffered badly giving rise to unemployment and recession (depression or decline).

he developing countries cut down on their exports to the developed world and faced a
downward economic slide (slippery movement). Politically, the US and her allies
(friends) decided on punishing the terrorists responsible for the terrorist acts in America.
They readied their armed forces to take action against terrorist and militant organizations
in suspected countries. Their main target was Osama bin Laden and his al-Qaeda network
of organizations, headquartered in Afghanistan. World public opinion at once demanded
Proofs of Osama’s involvement in the terrorist acts in America to justify his punishment.
f.f.^, B.fl. nghsh Simple Grammar & Composition

Even if the American intelligence agencies like the CIA (Central Intelligence Agencv)
and the FBI (Federal Bureau of Investigation) had been professionally perfect in their
duties in checking terrorism in America, the hatred of America could not have been
checked. As prophets and philosophers have always said, it is the inner feeling, the inner
thought that is powerful and permanent, the outer body or frame, the outer defences are
temporarily effective. Let the US build permanent bridges of love and justice, equality
and democracy all over the world with its tremendous power and resources. Let it start
working for peace and justice in the Middle East and Far East. Let it help the Palestinians
Kashmiries and the Chechens to gain their rights to start with. Then the souls of the
people killed during the terrorist attacks in America will be at peace and God Almighty
will be kind to America.

59. The American Attack on Afghanistan

1. The Introduction. The American and other forces attacked Afghanistan in October
2001.

2. Cause of the attack. Its progress and the Afghan war situation. -

3. Results of the attack.

4. The Conclusion. The need of the hour, to re-establish Israel outside the Middle East.
The UNO and the Islamic countries shouid help establish a popular and progressive

government in Afghanistan.

The US forces, with those of Britain, Germany and other countries at her back, started
heavy missile and air strikes on Kabul, Kandhar, Jalalabad and Mazar-e-Sharif on
October
7, 2001. The US reported that the military camps of Osama bin Laden’s Al-Qaeda
Organization and of the Taliban outside the main cities were the targets. In the waves of
the attacks by bombers, helicopters and submarines, bombs were dropped and missiles
were fired at the key radar and missile sites, training camps and control facilities.
Regrettably, the Jalalabad airport, the UN Kabul building and other government and
private buildings were destroyed in the impoverished (poor) country and many innocents
lost their precious lives.

The main cause of the US military action against Afghanistan was the terrorist attacks on
the World Trade Centre in New York, the Pentagon in Washington and the connected air
crashes on September 11, 2001 The US blamed this destruction mainly on Osama and the
Taliban sheltering him in Afghanistan. Ironically and disappointingly, the US and her
allies did not touch upon the first cause of the terrorist attacks in the US-America’s all-
out support of Israel and the injustices done to the Palestinians over the years besides her
disregard of the injustices to the Kashmiris and the Muslim communities elsewhere. ”The
wages of sin is death,” says the Holy Bible. And, the return of injustice is destruction like
that of the American business and defence nerve centres however much we may condemn
it.

Cries of pain are these, and pain undesewed.

But whom would thee blame when blame thee share’’

Ashamed is humanity ofthe wounds given ihee.

Sleep ha i e » e forgotten in remembrance of thy souls dear.

Great thou art, and great thoii will be

Only if thou decides! to banish thy passion for the unlrustu orthy

And shift thy trust to humanity trodden.

Trampled, divested, in hunger of thy sympathy.

And most of all thy justice (zrk) Die recover) ofthe wounded West will be long, and let it
show Job’s patience.

Along with the Western forces, the Northern Alliance or the Afghan forces have engaged
he Taliban more intensely (forcefully) with American support. Now the Taliban are
crushed >ervveen attacks from the south and north. In case the American and other forces
land in

Writing

221

Afghanistan is the depression (decline) in world business. Our foreign and internal trade
has suffered hadly and the employment situation has worsened. Investment in industry
and agriculture has slumped (gone down). Loan or aid-taking cannot promise
advancement and progress that the country. in fact, ”needs.

The war has caused large-scale entrance of Afghan refugees into Pakistan. Millions of
Afghans in their country have lost their homes and livelihood. All this has caused a
serious human situation. Pakistan has stretched its resources to feed and provide shelter to
the Afghans with the co-operation ofthe US and the UN. However, the sea ofthe
dislocated persons cannot allow any ship of assistance to sail smoothly.

Death has become cheap in the recent times. Terrorism has brought it to the doorsteps of
the richest and most powerful country as well as to those of the poorest and most
backward ones. From East to West, South to North everyone is crying for peace and
justice that the forefathers ofthe present generation so often did. but to what end?

The need ofthe hour is joint action by world bodies to ha\e justice in every part ofthe
world and peace with honour. The UN and the Islamic international organizations should
act together to establish an independent Palestinian state in the Middle East with all the
areas that rightfully belong to it. to liberate Kashmir from the Indians, to bring
independence to the Chechens and complete justice to the Bosnians. If. as an example.
Israel cannot co-exist with the Arabs, it can be recreated in some island like Cuba or
Hawaii to put a permanent end to the conflicts in the Middle East and the resultant
terrorism.

Lastly, the UN and all other positive world bodies should help in the establishment of a
broadbased popular government’ in Afghanistan. The””Loya Jirga” (representative body
ofthe Afghan elders from all walks of life) should, in any case, be actively associated
with these international deliberations (considerations or discussion) on Afghanistan.
These deliberations should continue in every continent by turn and all countries should be
given a chance of participation. No government foisted (forced) on Afghanistan by one,
two, three or more parties, without the participation of the world and the Afghans, will
last beyond a limited period of time. History will not forgive humanity if the right
decisions in the interest ofthe Afghan people are not taken by the world.

The war has caused large-scale entrance of Afghan refugees into Pakistan. Millions of
Afghans in their country have lost their homes and livelihood. All this has resulted in a
serious human situation. The Pakistan government has stretched its resources to feed and
provide shelter to the Afghans with the co-operation ofthe US and the UN. However, the
sea ofthe dislocated persons cannot allow any ship of assistance to sail smoothly.

The Author’s Considered Views on the present plight ofthe Third World countries ’I

Those ofthe Third World countries that are dependent on foreign loans or help and look to
foreign ”I guidance are, in fact, the victims of their past rulers or politicians. These
countries and nations have been failed miserably by their corrupt and inefficient rulers.
They have been deprived of education, progress and development. Their fates have been
sealed mercilessly by the rulers and their feudal companions. The corrupt and wealthy
have taken much of the national wealth abroad. Now. most of the developing countries
are backward and reactionary. The Afghanistan of today is a living example of the worst
kind of exploitation that continued for centuries by her rulers and leaders, and then by
foreigners. Whom can the Afghans or we blame when we are blameworthy? Whom can
we call aggressors when our rulers aggressed on our rights, trampled over social and
human values and kft the society a carcass (body without substance). Now is the time to
wake up to the realities of the situation that demand steadfast devotion to high ideals and
readiness to act upon them on the part of the rulers or leaders and on the part ofthe people
as a whole.

History or destiny does not know favouritism that we practise day in and day out and
pollute the whole environment. This is the disease, coming from the womb of her mother,
corruption, that has eaten into the vitals (essential elements) ofthe body politic. Give the
best chances to the best people whether they are rich or poor, and then you will raise an
army of brave, able and capable people who would steer the ship of the state to the lands
of glory and magnificence. To remember John Milton at this juncture is apt ((relevant)
though he put these glorious words into Satan’s mouth in ”Paradise Lost”:

Awake, arise, or for ever be fallen.

B.fl nghsh Simple Grammar Si Composition

o has fallen and where? Who will lift him up and how? It is we who will first lift
ourselves. We hen. force the high-ups to stop their waywardness at our cost. As a result,
they will be forced to power and progress with us. Let then the undeserving and incapable
be left behind and let merit

its day.

international meeting at Bonn in Germany in November 2001 was held in which

representative ferent world powers and Afghanistan discussed new ways of settling the
Afghan problem. It is ised that the scope of such meetings held under the UN should be
widened to include Pakistan ther countries neighbouring Afghanistan to have a permanent
arrangement for Afghanistan.

60. Corruption

Our warfare is not against flesh and blood.

But against principalities and powers and wickedness in the high place. icn we spoil the
purity of anything we corrupt it, and we do so because we are wicked lis sense. We begin
to destroy our honesty or integrity when we benefit others or :lves illegally and
immorally. When a person is in high position or place and he takes :s or benefits to favour
someone or does any kind of injustice, he is corrupt in the most

mon way.

; all know that comiption in almost all undeveloped or developing societies is the r of the
day (that is, is very common). Firstly, corruption is common because the ile in nencral,
especially in the developing or Third World countries, are not well off sperous or rich),
and they need more money and resources to meet their growing irements. Just take the
example of a clerk working in an office on a meagre (not igh) income who has to support
his wife and children. Finding it difficult to feed and le his family and to pay the rent of
the house and bear medical and educational :nses of the children, he begins accepting
petty bribes in his office. So, his officers de to accept bribes from the public to live better
lives or to raise their standards of ig. In the same uay, some of the highest government
officers and even ministers ive bribes or kickbacks (illegal commissions) from firms and
companies. This last kind orruption is based on the worst kind of greed that has nothing
to do with ”need” or [Uirement.”

iwever, corruption cannot be justified in any circumstances. If a person cannot easily e

both ends meet (cannot get enough money for his needs), he should work more or k
elsewhere to earn more. Those who can make or produce something atjiome like cets,
umbrellas or sweaters for the home market or for export should try to do so. Those > can
learn technical skills to work in workshops or factories should become expert micians.
Those who can teach in government or private schools and institutes should h as much as
they can. It is far better for the members of a family to labour and to earn ~ by little to
add to the family funds. The government and public organizations like the ii Trust and the
Bumey Foundation can formulate and popularize work programmes for erent categories
of families. How can corruption be brought to an end? irst, there should be as much
equality as possible in the country. The division of the iety into the classes of extremely
poor and extremely rich people and the middle class lout enough facilities and chances to
progress should go. As suggested elsewhere, the lal (’jagirdari’) structure in the villages
and the oppressive capitalistic structure in the ;s should be replaced by a fair, just one.

ccond/y, education should be within the reach of all manner of people. When the people
universally educated, they will be able to work more efficiently and their earnings will .
They will be generally satisfied and the causes of corruption will be mos.iy eliminated
:luded).

’hirdly, the leaders and politicians should be men of integrity. Their devoted leadership
honest dealings will set a pattern of life and work for the nation.

223

Writing

sov

Fourthly, a religious and moral atmosphere in society will create a sense of honest living
among the people. Our religious scholars, teachers, newspapers, radio and TV can play an
important role in this connection.

I fifthly, heavy punishments for corrupt people should keep them from indulging in

p. C0rrupti°n- Corrupt government servants and anyone accepting bribes in any form
should he punished after a proper trial in a court of law.

It is very difficult, though not impossible, to ->olve the difficult social problem of
corrupt*00’ It is we who will overcome corruption before we allow it to drown us in its

poison to kill us as a nation.

61. Environmental Pollution

Our movement into the 21st century has neither been smooth nor very happy as \\e find
the atmosphere and water increasingly polluted. In the cities, the air is getting dustier and
dirtier, and this atmospheric pollution is becoming troublesome and dangerous to
everyone, rich and poor alike. Our modern civilization is basically responsible for the
pollution in the atmosphere. Let us discuss the causes of this atmospheric or

environmental pollution.
Firstly, the tremendous rise in population or population explosion is much at the basis of
the pollution problem. With the increase in population, we need more houses, more
motorcycles, cars, buses and other vehicles emitting (giving out) smoke and gases.
Naturally, forest areas are reduced, trees are cut down to make room for houses with the
result that there is more of carbon dioxide and less of freshness in the air. With more
roads, rail and air traffic the atmosphere is further polluted. When there are more people
and more houses, the roads, drains, pipes and garbage heaps multiply with the result that
greenery begins to disappear and underground water resources begin getting polluted.
The fuel for cooking purposes, whether it is gas or coal or oil, is burnt for greater
quantities of food spreading pollution around. Population control is the need of the hour
in view of the overcrowded, dirty and polluted cities and towns.

Secondly, the setting up of industrial centres and factories in areas close to cities and
towns adds to the already existing pollution. No doubt cities go on expanding and reach
close to industrial areas or estates outside. But through careful planning residential areas
can be located very far away from industrial complexes. Further, machinery in factories
should be such as emits (gives out) the least dangerous exhaust (gas and steam) or makes
the least noise. In certain parts of our country, industries are polluting the city water and
atmosphere tremendously. For example, the industrial areas around Karachi, Lahore and
Faisalabad are adding to water and atmospheric pollution. The tanneries in the Punjab
give out liquids that mix with underground water reservoirs while their exhaust pollutes

the atmosphere.

Thirdly, tons of garbage (rubbish or refuse) and industrial wastes are dumped (unloaded)
underground or in rivers and seas. This causes insanitation (dirty living conditions),
killing of fish or sea animals or harms their growth. Falling oil from ships in the ocean
proves dangerous-to the sea-life. The atomic wastes of atomic reactors thrown into the
sea contaminate (make impure or bad) the water over long distances, and this
contaminated water reaches the seashores even. Better ways of dumping industrial and
atomic waste should be found so that the health and life of sea creatures and human
beings are not affected. Rather, the quantity of these wastes should be reduced through
population control, controlled demands for industrial products, simpler ways of life and
an end to large-scale war preparations.
225

B n aglsl, s,»pl. Gram, s Conponon 0« U*’”J d B ^ wo,kers of all kinds ’”^’^”’oTaking

them

„,„ ,^sion> of carbon dioxide and Young men -«’ ^ stari their use -»lf **J I, work proper,,.

tfi/y the burning of chemicals and giving out (emission) of carbon dioxide and ases bv
heavy machines and cars add greatly to atmospheric pollution. The carbon » stops’ the
sunrays from returning from the earth’s surface after reflection. Besides i- the earth, it
causes storms, floods and dryness. The air that we breathe gets impure e can fall ill more
easily. The burning and air-conditioning processes disturb the layer above the atmosphere
dangerously. The disturbed ozone layer does not stop dangerous ultraviolet rays from
reaching the earth. This causes too much heating of rth diseases of the skin and other
diseases if a person exposes (opens) his body to

i for long.

My, noise pollution is no less painful and harmful than the pollution caused by gases
aemicals. The sounds of horns, machines, flying aeroplanes, weapons in operation,
peakers and music sets and loud cries and quarrels of people pollute the atmosphere This
noise pollution disturbs the mind, upsets regular work or sttidy and helps in ig nervous
and mental disorders. It is necessary to reduce noise pollution as much as Me by
educating and training the people in producing the least disturbing and

mforting noises.

should act quickly to check the different kinds of pollution as discussed at the Earth nit
(conference of different countries) in Brazil in 1992. Population growth needs to mtrolled
immediately, especially in the developing countries. Carbon dioxide and gases should not
be emitted (given out) in disturbing quantities. Too many vehicles Id not ply (go back and
forth) on the roads, and those giving out much smoke and in particles should be taken off.
Machines producing the least dangerous gases and :s should be used in cars, buses,
factories, and so on. Garbage and industrial and lie wastes should not be thrown into
rivers and seas in any quantities whatsoever. : need to understand the true dimensions of
pollution that is perhaps one of the test problems of the new century, as much as of the
old, plaguing the health and well g of billions. While it is manageable (controllable) at
present, it will get out of control ’e advance farther into the new century, if we do not
activate ourselves for pollution rol. It is heartening that the US, France Britain and some
developing countries are ig the lead in this connection.

62. Drugs and their Dangers (or) Drug Abuse rhe Introduction-The use of drugs is on the
rise. Where drugs are produced. The use of drugs and the manner of their use.
International checks on drug abuse. The Conclusion-the UNO should act.

lore and more people have begun using drugs like heroin, opium and marijuana shish) all
over the world. The United Nations and other world organizations are ively trying to
control the growth, supply, sale and use of drugs in different countries. hese drugs are
mostly produced in two areas of Asia. One is called the ”Golden angle” and it covers
huge tracts of land in Thailand, Laos and Burma. The other area is led the ’•Golden
Crescent” which covers Pakistan, Afghanistan and Iran. In Thailand, example, marijuana
is grown on quite a big scale and is exported to Australia, Canada
1 the United States. In our country the production of opium and heroin has reduced no
ubt. but still it is quite high. These are illegally taken out to other countries by various

DODDV crops over vast areas by aerial spray

sov

Young men and women, students and workers of all ns n

started using drugs. Those who start their use soon get into the habit of taking them
regularly. The drugs affect their body and mind so badly that they cannot work properly,
more drugs. And when they cannot earn much they either begin

oin angs of thieves o

„,„„»,„,„„»

I v,. ,_

started using drugs. Those WHU a^.

regularly. The drugs affect their body and mind so badly that they caimui. ...... r_

They need money to buy more drugs. And when they cannot earn much they either begin
selling their things and property or become criminals. They can join gangs of thieves or
robbers or terrorists. As drug taking becomes common, the society begins moving

towards destruction. The enemy can defeat the people of a country without firing a shot
by making them fall

into drug-taking habits. Something of this kind had happened in China where the western

people had cleverly made the Chinese opium addicts (those who could not stop taking it).

The Chinese Revolution brought all opium taking to an end. It is said that terrorists are
sending drugs to Thailand and Malaysia from the ”Golden Triangle”. While the terrorists
gain money from drug smuggling, they also plan to destroy the societies of the countries
finally to overpower them. Thus, drug traffic (trade) is connected with international

politics. Almost all countries are trying to check the use of drugs. We are also trying to
stop the

smuggling of drugs from Afghanistan and their despatch to other countries from here.
There are heavy punishments for dealers in drugs. Thailand, Malaya, the Philippines,
Indonesia etc. are co-operating to stop the movement of drugs. It is high time the UNO
arranged a total prohibition of (ban on) drugs with the cooperation of all countries. At
least in the field of drugs, there is international agreement.
63. How to Solve Our Electricity Problems (or) The Power Crisis and How to Resolve it

1. The Introduction-Modern life will be impossible without electricity.

2. Causes of high prices of electricity or the power crisis:

(i) Low water level in our dams not helping us to produce enough hydro-electricity.
(electricity produced by water-power), (ii) Electricity produced by thermal power stations
(using heat from coal or oil to produce electricity) in collaboration with foreign
companies is too expensive, (in) The absence of enough atomic (nuclear) power stations,
(iv) The

growing demand for electricity.

3- How to produce enough electricity at cheap rates.

4. Our progress depends much on a proper supply of electricity.

Modern life will surely be impossible without electric energy. We need it almost
everywhere-in our homes, in the shops, in the factories, on the farms, on the roads and in
all public places like hospitals and educational institutions. For some years now we have
been trying to solve our electricity problem faced with an acute (serious) shortage of
electricity in the 1980s and early 1990s. The long hours of load shedding for industry and
agriculture contributed to decline in national production and caused untold hardships to
tne people at large. Let us study the main causes of the crisis that is not over yet.

first, the water level in the dams like the Tarbela, Mangla, and Warsak is at times very
low. Because of it the generation (production) of hydroelectric power suffers a great deal,
ihen we have not constructed until now as many dams as we need. For example, the
Kalabagh Dam, the Bhasha Dam in the northern areas on the Indus and certain other such
Possible dams could have eased the present difficult situation of power generation in the

country.

Second, we do not have enough facilities for the generation of thermal power (power
generated from coal or oil). The setting up of thermal power stations is highly expensive
>S’«Oo

_.. ^.,yu>ii jniifjie orommor & Cornp

for a developing country like ours. Our efforts to set up such power stations with the IPp
(Independent Power Producers) skyrocketed electricity rates and brought the WAPDA the
brink (edge) of bankruptcy.

Third, we do not have enough nuclear power stations because of our dependence
hydroelectric power and lack (absence) of equipment and materials. The nuclear pow°n
station at Karachi-the KANUPP (the Karachi Nuclear Power Plant)-has, howev^ worked
well and gives us hopes of having such stations around the country. The ChashrT’ Power
Plant, planned in 1993 to be set up in the Frontier province, should have improv A the
power situation a great deal.

Fourth, new industries continue to be set up and agriculture continues to be mechanized

Factories in the industrial centres and tube-wells and power-operated farm machinery
need electricity most of the time. Its shortage and repeated load shedding affect
production badly.

Fifth, the demand for electricity continues to rise with the electrification of our villages
We need to generate enough power for the thousands of villages across the country that
are still to be electrified. The new housing colonies in the cities further cause an increase
in the demand for electricity.

Sixth, rich families, business establishments and offices use air-conditioners in the
summer and electric heaters in the winter. This is a serious stain on our energy resources.
It will be in national interest to reduce the use of these electric appliances. Even the use
of extra electric fans, refrigerators and lights (beyond the need) affects the power supply
badly.

We should increase power production in all possible ways. There is the need to store in
our dams the water of our rivers, rain water and water from melted ice flowing along
natural channels as much as possible. There can be more dams for this purpose. Then
hydro-electricity could be produced perhaps more than we need and could be exported as
well. We should set up thermal power stations wherever needed, but on our own and
generate (produce) electricity at reasonable expense. And, as far as possible, we should
produce their machinery inside the country. We should set up nuclear power stations in as
great a number as possible. But this generation of electricity should, by all means, go
hand in hand with rapid and continuous industrialization, -mechanization of.agriculture,
setting up of manufacturing centres for export and bringing into effect programmes of
mass education, scientific, technological, technical, professional and general education all
over the country.

Agricultural, industrial and commercial progress depends a great deal on a proper supply
of cheap electricity all through the year. Already, we use much less electricity than the
advanced countries. To come up to their level of development, we should have a regular
supply of electricity according to our growing needs, and definitely at low rates
comparable to those in the countries developing in the true sense.

64. The Uses and Value of Games

1. The Introduction-Games or sports a necessary part of a nation’s life.

2. Different kinds of games.

3. Benefits of playing games.

4. Some abuses of games.

5. The Conclusion-Games are very useful if they are rightly played.

Games and sports have always been taken as a necessary part of a nation’s life. Games
were played in olden times as much as they are played today.

Outdoor games include football, hockey, cricket, baseball, etc. Indoor games include ds
carom, chess, table tennis, etc. Some games like badminton can be played inside a
building as well as outside.

Tames improve our health and make us active. Outdoor games give a lot of exercise to
the body and make us healthy if we play them regularly. A person playing a game like
hockey, football or tennis every day hardly ever falls ill.

Games teach us well how to compete with others in life. They make us brave. We do not
lose heart or get discouraged when we fail to win. We do not become sad or angry
because we know defeat is a necessary part of playing.

Games and sports, in fact build our characters. They make us bold and hopeful. They
make us honest as we accept the just decisions of an umpire and do not mind our defeat.

Yet there are some abuses of games as well. Firstly, it is harmful for students to play
games when they should study their books or prepare for their examinations.

Playing indoor games like cards and chess very often and over long hours is harmful to
the health. A player has to keep sitting for hours while playing them and does not have
physical exercise at all. Gambling in any game is its worst abuse. A person who gambles
can lose all his wealth. It is quite common in games like cards, chess and horseracing.

We do not play a game like true sportsmen if we are not prepared to accept defeat. We
should not be proud of our skill in any game even if we happen to be the best players.

Games are very useful if they are rightly played. We should try to play the games suited
to us in a regular way. However, we should not play at the cost of our studies or duties in
society.

65. Hobbies or Pastimes

1. The Introduction-We pass our free time in different ways.

2. Hobbies may become habits.

3. Good and bad hobbies.

4. The importance or value of hobbies - benefits of hobbies.

5. The Conclusion-We should try to have some good hobbies.

People in society have different hobbies or pastime*1 to enjoy themselves in their leisure
(free) time. Some people, for example, like to play games, some like to go for a walk, ’
some like to watch films, and so on.

Good hobbies or pastimes can help us to improve the body and the mind. For the
improvement of the body and health, we may have the hobbies of playing games outside
on playgrounds. We can also have the hobbies of swimming, running, walking over long
distances, and so on. Morning and evening walks every day give a lot of exercise to the
body. Gardening keeps us in contact with nature and fresh air and makes us active.

For the improvement of the mind, we can have hobbies like reading good and useful
books, visiting historical places, watching films which increase (add to) our knowledge of
the sciences and the arts. The hobby of reading books on the sciences, history and general

knowledge is of much use. So the hobby of readir« newspapers every day is of great
benefit.

Some harmful hobbies are playing cards for a long time, watching all manner of films
very often, listening to bad films songs, reading bad books, and so on. We enjoy these
hobbies while sitting and cannot take exercise. Bad films and writings harm our thinking
ar»d character.

No doubt hobbies help us to pass our free time happily (without being bored) and make
Us forget all our troubles, worries and problems. Some hobbies increase our knowledge
as
828

6 fl 6nghsh Simple Grammar 61

|Q

well as entertain us. For example, through writing letters to pen friends in other cities
foreign countries, we learn about other places. We feel happy while informing othe ?
about our city, village or country. Stamp collecting is another such hobby. Through it u,S
come to know about different countries and cultures and enjoy exchanging stamps.

Hobbies make life charming and add to our happiness. They bring us new friends and
make us social.

66. Country (Village) Life (as compared with City Life)

1. The Introduction-Both country (village) and city life have their pleasures and
problems for us.

2. A brief description of village and city life.

3 . Advantages and disadvantages of living in villages and in cities.

4. The Conclusion-We should provide most of the Modern facilities of cities in villages

Both city and village life have their pleasures and troubles for us. We have a great many
comforts in cities that we do not have in villages. We can ha,ve many pleasures in
villages that we cannot get in cities.

Our village men do not remain busy all the year round. It is during sowing or reaping
(cutting) the crops that they work hard. Otherwise, they look after their crops and animals
in a rather routine manner. Most village women are hardworking. They get up early in the
morning, cook food, wash clothes, look after their children and clean their huts or houses.
At times village women also work with men in the fields, for example, while reaping
(cutting) the crops.

Most of our villages do not have good schools. Children generally get religious and basic
education in mosques or small primary schools. Many children remain idle or work with
their parents in the fields or at home. In our cities, we have plenty of schools, colleges,
and institutions of higher learning.

Uneducated city people work hard to earn their living. They work as labourers in
factories or in the construction of new buildings or as servants in shops, hotels or other
commercial places. Most educated people work in offices, banks, business organizations
and educational institutions. Rich businesspersons, strong industrialists, and hefty (big
and strong) landowners enjoy most of the facilities of city life to the full.
There are many advantages of living in a village. Firstly, village people can get cheap,
fresh and pure food easily. Secondly, villagers live in the open and fresh air. Thirdly,
villagers work in the fields and at other places and thus get a lot of physical exercise.
Then the people of a village live like a huge family. They share each other’s joys and
sorrows, co-operate in difficulties and work jointly for digging drains or wells, making
roads, constructing mosques, and so on.

There are, however, some great disadvantages of village life. Village people do not often
have good educational and medical facilities. They do not generally have paved or
smooth roads. The houses are often very small and badly constructed. The roads are
mostly in ba shape. Most of our villages are without electricity and water works. What we
find missing in the villages can be had in the cities.

In the cities we cannot easily get cheap, fresh and pure food. The cost of living ’s.^u’
high. Most of our cities are facing the problem of overpopulation. The atmosphere in
thickly populated areas is not clean and fresh (is polluted) partly because of the sm° ’

given out by vehicles and machines. These areas are called slums where people m°s *
live in hovels (small dirty places).

Writing

229

oe0ple living in different parts of a city often do not know each other intimately i elv)
They cannot co-operate and work together like villagers. (clos y 67. The Role of the
Radio and Television

The Introduction-The radio and tele\ ision play a very important role. The radio and
television present programmes of entertainment. *

” The radio and television present programmes of information. The radio and tele\ ision
promote national unity, programmes about other countries and international affairs. The
Conclusion-Programmes of a high standard are needed.

The radio and television play a very important role in a nation’s life as they affect the ., s
and behaviour of all sorts of people. The number of people listening to the radio and
watching television programmes is increasing (becoming more) fast.

The radio and television present various kinds of programmes. Firstly, they present
programmes of entertainment. We can enjoy listening to different forms of music and
songs on the radio just as we can enjoy tales (stories) of wonder and reports of adventures
in the mountains and unknown lands. We can listen to interesting dramas. We can view
musical programmes on television just as we can watch films or dramas. Thus, the radio
and television make us happy. They make us forget our worries or troubles for some time
at least. All categories (classes) of young and old people should be able to enjoy the radio
and television programmes of their choice.

Secondly, the radio and television present programmes of information. The most
important of these is the radio or television news. We listen to the news with great
interest. The radio and television get the latest news from all corners of the world and
convey it within minutes.

Educational programmes of different kinds are presented on the radio and television.
These programmes are very informative. There are lectures and discussions on science
and arts subjects. For example, films on scientific inventions and developments in the
advanced countries are (telecast pfesented on TV).

There are special programmes on the radio and television for the working people. For

example, there is the agricultural programme in which farmers are taught new and

e ective methods of farming. Special programmes for villagers are broadcast on the

ra 10- &1 them they listen to village music and songs, discussions about their problems,

”ne-honoured customs and traditions, changes in their social life, and so on. They listen

nevvs ar>d prices of different commodities (articles of trade). There can be more of such

Programmes, for example, for labourers working in the factories.

th C ra • ° 3nd te’evisi°n present programmes on national affairs. In -these programmes

gov P°’itical activities of the rulers and leaders are described. The policies of the
indn^ment m d’fferent fields of national life like education, science, agriculture and
described and discussed. Details of important national events like general conveyed. The
economic, educational and cultural problems of the people by leaders, specialists and able
people.

and television present useful programmes concerning international affairs. .un.0 ’ us

arjout the relations between different countries, their disputes and their

’”’IvtTlQ TV.

The H- y Present reports and discussions on their political and economic policies.
harmfui ° 3nd television should present programmes of a high standard, not those to the
taste or character of the people.

r- 68. The Role of The Press

are d’ T1 Th
B H fenglish Simple Grammar I

1. The Introduction-Newspapers and magazines play an important role.

2. Newspapers give the latest political news-criticize harmful political activities, nr •

good ones and make suggestions for bringing about political unity. ’ 1Se

3. Newspapers describe the economic situation.

4. Newspapers give a true and correct picture of society.

5. Newspapers provide all sorts of foreign news.

6. Newspapers provide news about wars and the efforts of the United Nati Organization
to end them. Ons

Newspapers and magazines (or the press) play a very important role in national life

Firstly, newspapers keep the people informed about the political activities of i
government. They give in detail the statements or speeches made by the rulers at
meetings or on the radio or television. They also report the activities of political • _ and
leaders. Standard newspapers criticize the policies and statements of the government or
of the political parties in a fair (just) way.

Secondly, newspapers describe the economic policies of the government. For example
they describe its impor>and export policies, its plans for future economic development
the prices of different things fixed by it, and so on. Our newspapers have always reported
in detail the economic poUcjes of OMt$|BSgnt governments in the fields of agriculture,
industry andxet)mmerce\Tft^riav’c afeo described the problems of labourers, farmers and
other working people and suggested their solutions.

Thirdly, newspapers give a true and correct picture of society. They describe the activities
of the people in different fields like education, business, industry, law, medicine, science,
and so on. They tell us about the activities of students and teachers, businessmen,
industrialists, lawyers, doctors, scientists and all categories of working people. They
convey information regarding the different crimes taking place every day.

Fourthly, newspapers tell about the political, economic and social changes in different
countries. They inform about the changes of governments and revolutions in different
parts of the world. They give descriptions of changes taking place in other societies in
education, science, medicine, industry, agriculture and defence preparation.

Newspapers give detailed ngtfs about wars taking place in different parts of the world
They give pictures of scenes of war. They discuss the causes and possible results of those
wars and the efforts of the UNO (United Nations Organization) to stop them, pey criticize
the UNO if it does not act suitably. _nt<? XT* l r
Newspapers have columns for entertainment. We find humorous essays or features
(special long articles) on interesting subjects like fashions and strange habits/Newspapers
provide information on sports, new films, dramas, musical programmes and othertufcw8’
activities. At regular intervals, there are special columns for women, children, students
and labours.

Newspapers should play a constructive role. They should publish news and reports about
all the aspects of our national life. They should aim at bringing the people of the country
closer in all possible ways.

69. The Role of Films j

1. The Introduction-All kinds of people see films. Their effects on our ideas an behaviour.

2. The First great role of films-to entertain the people.

3. The second great role-to teach good lessons of life to the people.

4. The third great role-to promote national unity.

231

The fourth great role-to educate the people.

5. i” Conclusion-We should make our film industry really beneficial.

6. , manner of people like to see films. Rich and poor people, students, labourers, k rs in
different fields of life, women who stay in their homes, and even children

W° it TVs and VCRs have made it possible for many to watch films, of their choice.
^TrT first great role of films is to entertain the people in the best possible ways. Films Id
have really good and artistic stories, dialogues, music and dances. It should be the Sff \ of
film producers and directors to make such films as offer entertainment of a high

°The second great role of films is to teach good lessons of life. Film should teach us ueh
good stories how we can live nobly and well. They should tell us about different ’ocial
problems and about the ways of resolving them. They should, whenever and Wherever
possible, ”hold the mirror up” to our society.

The third great role of films is to promote national unity and integrity. They can do this
by making their national duties and responsibilities clear to the people. They should
present stories and events about patriotism or love for the country. They should describe
the life of the people of all the provinces.

The fourth great role of films in our life is educational. Films in foreign countries on
science subjects like physics, chemistry and biology are very beneficial (useful). There
films produced on the arts like music, painting and literature are also greatly useful. In
our country, too, films on the sciences and arts should be produced for purely educational
purposes. Films on historical events and wars also increase (add to) our knowledge a
great deal.

We should try to make the best use of our film industry. We should make it really
beneficial to the people. ^

70. The Uses of Libraries (Pun., Mul., A.K.) v^-’”*

1. The Introduction-Libraries are necessary for educational, social and national or cultural
progress.

2. They provide all sorts of books.

3. They provide newspapers and magazines.

4- Videocassettes and films in libraries need to be provided.

5- The atmosphere in libraries is generally suitable for studies.

°- The Conclusion-Our need for well-equipped libraries should be fulfilled. Libraries are
necessary for educational, social and national progress. They are

storehouses of knowledge where \ve can find all kinds of books and ideas. fkttty, a library
provides all sorts of books on different subjects. We can read many tflerent books on the
same subject by various writers. Thus, for reading the ideas of

j. rent writers on the same subject or for comparing their ideas (for comparative study) e
library is the best place. For example, a student or scholar may like to read the ideas of
1 ferent writers on democracy. He finds perhaps hundreds of books on the history and
°rkuig of democracy by foreign writers and our own. He can then write fine essays or

n en Books on democracy and other systems of government himself. A person cannot

jj nnaHy buy a very large number of books on a subject. Even if he can but most of them,
cannot keep them all the time in his house. He cannot change his rooms into a library.

^ eco/K#K, a ijbrary provides different newspapers in different languages. We can read

ty ne\vspapers we like and then compare the news and views in one with those in others.
’Cannot practically buy so many newspapers each day. A library makes available so
232

e-fl- english Simple Grammar &

many magazines coming from different parts of the country and from all comers world.
We may be able to borrow them at times.

Thirdly, modern libraries now provide videocassettes and films on arts and subjects. We
can view them in the library itself. Or sometimes we can borrow t] use at home or in
school or college. We can thus combine the pleasures of reading •”’ listening and
watching films on the mini screen (of TV). ^

Fourthly, libraries have a very proper atmosphere or situation for studies. We can there
for hours on end without being disturbed by any noise or talk. If we becorn S” regular
visitor to a library, we can get into the habit of studying regularly. Then we 3 improve
our general knowledge and the knowledge of our courses of study easily.

We should have useful and well-equipped libraries in every part of the country.
71. National Unity or Integrity (Mul.)

1. The Introduction-National unity makes a country strong and prosperous.

2. National unity is the need of the hour as we are surrounded by many dangers.

3. How we can have greater national unity:

(a) By acting on the principles of our religion.

(b) By adopting a common national language and culture.

(c) By giving proper chances to the provinces to develop their own languages and
cultures.

(d) By giving proper chances to the provincial governments to solve their problems
according to the wishes of the people.

(e) By encouraging trade and travel between the different provinces.

(f) By having real democracy.

(g) By having justice and equality in society as much as possible.

4. The Conclusion-The government and the people should work together for greater
national unity.

National unity makes a country strong and prosperous (rich). It makes it have policies
and aims for which the people work together. Then other countries cannot easily oppose
or attack it.

We are surrounded by many dangers. Powerful countries lie close to our borders. Our
relations with a//of these cannot always be cordial (warm and sincere) as we can’t please
everyone in world policies. Those very much opposed to us can think of taking advantage
of our internal (inner) weaknesses and differences. It, then, becomes necessary for usio
get united as a nation and to make ourselves truly strong.

We should try to have greater national unity in some such ways. Firstly, we should all act
on the principles of our religion. We should be true Muslims in matters of worship and in
the performance of our social duties.

Secondly, we should give proper chances to the provinces to develop their own languages
and cultures. These languages and cultures are precious treasures of old an new words
and ideas. They should assist the national language and culture in their growtn Thus we
shall be achieving (getting) two aims-satisfying the people as a whole and taking
advantage of their cultural wealth.

Thirdly, we should give all the provinces equal chances of growth and developing • The
provincial governments should have proper powers to solve their problemspeople should
feel satisfied with the solution of those problems at the provincial leveIs- ^

Fourthly, we should promote trade and travel between one province and another, will
bring the people closer and promote national unity.

UJriting

fa we should try to have real justice and equality all over the country. The people Id feel
that nobody can do injustice to others however rich or powerful he may be. snu° snould
feel that they all have equal chances of progress. If they are able and ^ ^working, they
should be able to make quick progress.

^The government and the people should work together for greater national unity. The
sentatives of the people should have discussions with the government about their ^oblems
and ways of promoting unity.

Pr 72. The Problem and Tragedy of Karachi

Karachi is the most important gateway to Pakistan, the only developed and operative oort
and the largest city of the country. Its international (cosmopolitan) status is w-vond doubt
and its place of pride on sea and air routes between different countries is

well recognized.

\Ve all know how for years, since the mid-1980s Karachi has been in the grip of
terrorism, social or ethnic violence and religious or sectarian fighting. Thousands of
innocent people have lost their lives. ”Extremists, hired killers and assassins are on the
rampage (madly active), slaughtering Pathans, Muhajirs, Sindhis, Punjabis, Bohras,
Khojas, Sunnis, Shias, diplomats, men, women and children without regard to ethnicity,
creed or colour.” The causes of such a national problem of vast dimensions, destructive
possibilities and disintegration are not difficult to gauge (judge). Firstly, the conflict
between its population of comparatively better educated and cultured refugees
(”muhajirs”) and the local and provincial Sindhis, less educated and backward, is the first
basic cause. This opposition between the ”muhajirs” dominating cultural and commercial
centres in Karachi and other big cities of Sindh and the Sindhis in these cities and in the
villages went on developing.

Secondly, the swift influx (flowing in) of all the other people, that is, Pathans, Punjabis
and Balochis and foreign elements from Iran, Afghanistan and central Asia increased
(added to) the conflicts and opposition already on the boiling point.

Thirdly, the creation and rise of the Muttahidda Qaumi Movement (the MQM) led to an
armed struggle between the ”muhajir” leadership and other political parties for the
capture of political and economic power. Later, the MQM was subdivided, and another
group, called ”Haqiqi,” within it came into conflict with the main organization. The
fighting between the main MQM and the Haqiqi compounded the social and political
chaos (complete disorder) and multiplied the killings.

fourthly, sectarian parties, of the Sunnis and the Shias, became actively involved in neir
own conflicts and rivalries. The killings in and around mosques and other prayer centres
were reported to be the result foreign religious involvement as well.

inhly, the drug mafia (international criminal organization), arms and ammunition

uPphers and foreign agents have been actively busy in the city with their assignments. Of

Urse they were assigned to sell drugs and weapons and to expand the areas of terrorism

,° terribly as to collapse the whole structure (edifice) of law and order on the heads of the

enforcers. After the social and political collapse, they could easily take over all the

leTitory.

ixthly, and most importantly, the inefficiency, corruption and lack (absence) of

anning and foresight of the political leaders and the absence of a suitable, workable

lav’1Ca^ System caused the situation to develop into a volcano of burning and
consuming
typ8 people were not educated and trained on suitable lines. Industry and commerce

re not developed according to set plans to absorb the educated and trained people justly
business. Some northern areas in our country produce heroin that is smuggled enriching
our traders greatly. Neither international nor national opinion is in favour o continuance
of the production and smuggling of heroin, marijuana or other narcotics. Tr, drug traders
win assembly seats on the strength of money, disturb business and push srn n traders out
of it, and make a show of their wealth and spread corruption around \v should get the
cultivation of all drugs stopped by providing alternative sources of incon^ to the
cultivators. The smuggling of drugs should be stopped forthwith. The wealth that the drug
smugglers or drug barons (leaders) have accumulated should be taken back bv the State.

Fourthly, illiteracy is the greatest evil of our society because of which the people cannot
understand their problems and social realities well. It has kept them backward to this day
In fact, about 90 per cent people here are illiterate or semi-literate. To be semi-literate
masses to be able to read and write a little out without any academic qualification or
degree and without any real understanding of the facts and realities of modern
mechanical, scientific and socially advanced \vorld. These people can never hope to
advance in agriculture, business, industry, politics or any other •field without the required
amount of education.

Fifthly, connected with illiteracy is overpopulation or population explosion in the country.

The poor, uneducated people have the largest number of children and the biggest
families. It is in their ignorant boredom and ignorant situation that their minds and bodies
do not co-ordinate rationally. They go on producing children only to add to their own and
the country’s problems. Now, the economic expansion in the country cannot match the
increase in population. The country cannot become truly advanced and the people cannot
be prosperous or rich unless the blind population rise is not put an end to through
education and training.

Sixthly, unemployment goes hand in hand with the abnormal increase in population. This
is one of the most intriguing (puzzling) problems of all developing and even of some
developed countries. The economy should expand, industrialization should be faster and
technical and industrial education should be given on a large scale. When the population
growth is also controlled well, the job situation will improve considerably (much, a great
deal).

Seventhly, the problem of rising prices or inflation or the fall in the value of the rupee is
constantly painful for the common person. This problem is directly connected with
underdevelopment of the economy (weak industry, old-fashioned farming, improper use
of work force and natural resources because of faulty planning). Production at home
being less than required and exports being inadequate (not enough), the national income
is low, and the standard of living of the people can’t be raised to a proper level. With the
tremendous rise in population, they must pay higher prices for shrinking quantities of
goods. The solution to the problem of inflation is clear: greater production of quality
goods and rising exports.

In the eighth place, the problem of rapid shift of village populations to the cities
(urbanization) and pressure on cities can be addressed by developing our countryside
properly. By setting up small (cottage) and export-oriented industries and by increasing
commerce between villages we can provide employment opportunities to villagers thus
discouraging their mass movement to cities.

In the ninth place, the rising tide of crime, especially in the cities, in the form ot
dacoities, murders, sexual abuse and corruption in different forms can only be checked »

UJnting «’

0|ution to the seven big problems outlined above can be suitably found. Every society ; S
effective government, justice and fair play in every comer to achieve peace and ill its
sections.

*”i”ihe tenth place, on top of it all, the problem of national integration or national unity
utralizing the fissiparous (divisive) tendencies in the provinces needs to be resolved.

11 forms of ethnic or racial and provincial feelings that cut across national unity need to
enlaced by patriotic and nationalistic feelings. This can be done only by a combination

f the educational, political and economic policies and programmes outlined above. °Our
country, like the other developing countries, needs a Modern democratic set-up, vyith an
educated population, industrialization in full swing, agriculture in full

, veiopment and social peace and security the order of the day, our country can be a truly

Hvanced one. We need to find a lasting solution to our problems that, if not done away
with in time, are likely to do away with us.

75. Democracy in Pakistan

The progress of democracy hi Pakistan has been most irregular (of fitful) and
unsatisfactory for several different reasons that we shall discuss in this essay. At the start,
it may be clearly emphasized that, according to the Objectives, Resolution, passed by the
Constituent Assembly (assembly for constitution making) in 1949, Pakistan was to have a
completely democratic system of government within an Islamic framework: ”The
principles of democracy, equality, freedom and social justice as enunciated (expressed) by
Islam shall be fully observed.” Unfortunately our constitution-makers and top leaders
never fully understood the need for having the conditions in the country in which the
principles of democracy could work. Let us, Firstly, consider the conditions in which
democracy could succeed, but did not succeed owing to their almost complete absence.

Firstly, the successful working of democracy anywhere is possible when the people as a
whole, are educated and well informed. It is a most ugly fact of our social life that more
than 80 per cent of our people are either thoroughly illiterate or only some of them know
how to write their names or how to write the basic ABC. They do not understand what is
happening around in the country or the world. They cannot vote intelligently at all. Then
what is the use of elections in which the people are expected to elect the most suitable
candidates to the assemblies after reading or discussing their programmes (manifestoes)?
The prime duty of our first governments (starting with Prime Minister Liaquat Ali Khan)
was to introduce a universal education programme in the whole country on a war footing
(when the population was also much smaller). But the introduction and implementation
of this education programme was not possible without reforming and in fact changing
altogether the agricultural or feudal (”zamindari” or ”jagirdari”) system.

Secondly, in Pakistan the existence of the formidable (difficult to defeat or deal with
zamindari” or feudal system allowed the big landlords to control and direct the lives of
Billions of farm labourers and farmers working under them. These labourers and petty
termers and their families still constitute (form) the majority of the country’s total
Population, and they are almost all illiterate and most backward. Now the big
”zamindars” Or ’Jagirdars” or feudal lords do not want these backward land workers to
get educated and to rise up socially. The feudal or ”jagirdari” system should have been
broken up long

r5nCitller by our flrst P°liticalrulers or then by our military dictators. The vast (big) rural
~~ 0 populations have been voting in our general elections like cattle, senselessly and
lically on the directions of the ”jagirdars.” The members of our elected national
Provincial assemblies, made up mostly of feudal lords, have worked in their own
238

B ft english Simple Grammar

239

interest and to their own benefit keeping the country backward. Seeing the strength of the
”jagirdars” in the assemblies, the biggest industrialists or magnates jumped into the
political arena (scene) sharing the political and commercial benefits their ”jagirdar”
brothers. The political history of Pakistan, thus, is that of these and industrialists at the
top joining hands with military dictators and facilitating rule. The stage for the enactment
of the tragedy of democracy in Pakistan was prepar H and erected by the first political
leaders after the Quaid-i-Azam. This tragedy was enacted by ”jagirdars”, industrial lords
(magnates) and military dictators in which the cornm0n people were dumb spectators all
the time sitting on the periphery (external boundary) Of the political arena (scene).

In the whole political set-up of the country, intellectuals, scholars, teachers and truly
devoted and able patriots were mostly kept out of the electoral process or the power
corridors or circles. As a result, our top political leaders-ministers, chief ministers, prime
ministers and presidents-have been coming from the richest classes or, in some cases
from professional civil servants (bureaucrats). They did not combine in them ability and
vision (ability to think of and imagine future developments). They were responsible for
three material laws and several unfruitful general elections. The basic fault with our
politics has been one of leadership. In the absence of suitable leaders, no democracy can
succeed, and in the presence of useless and selfish leaders, any democracy can be
destroyed. Our conclusion, after watching the political drama over the years, is that the
country has had a worthless kind of plutocracy (= government by a rich and powerful
class) so far in which the participation of the people through elections is only a farce
(play for the theatre).

Thirdly, democracy in Pakistan has been seriously hampered (checked from developing)
by other factors between 1979 and the present: war in Afghanistan, the rise of drug
culture in and out of the country, the rise of terrorism, the growth of provincialism and
sectarianism (division of society into sects or groups of their own faith), population
explosion and rapid economic decline. The arrival of the Afghan refugees and Pakistan’s
help to the Afghan freedom fighters caused a free flow of arms into and outside the
country. All this, combined with India’s machinations (plotting), promoted terrorism, and
the country witnessed bomb-blasts and disturbances every now and then. Sindh, in
particular, became a hotbed of crime. The production and smuggling of drugs like heroin
not only increased the number of drug addicts, but enriched the drug merchants (barons).
The drug barons began controlling politics offering bribes in assemblies to boost their
parties. In the name of provincial love and religious devotion, the enemies of national
unity came out fighting in groups. The population crossed 100 million mark, and the
people became poorer and more dissatisfied with the soaring (rising rapidly) prices and
growing unemployment. In all this confusion, the people in general lost confidence in
political leaders and parties. Their problems of personal security and economic survival
began weighing heavily upon them and their interest in politics and elections flagged or
lessened (became less) considerably.

The separation of East Pakistan from West Pakistan was the result of mismanagement ot
state affairs in the political and economic fields. We should take a lesson now at least ana
decide to create the best social, political and economic conditions for me promotion

national unity and for democratic progress. Democracy will die its natural death if we o
not put an end to the major evils like bribery, corruption, economic inequality and
feudalism or ”jagirdari” at their top.

76. The New Local Government (LB) System

Introduction. Background of the new local government system. What it means. i The
LB systems in the past and the new LB system. ’ structure of the new LB system. A
When the new LB system can be successful and when it is going to fail.

The Conclusion.What, in fact, should be done now in our present situation.

Local government systems have worked for centuries in the advanced countries of

Furope- In Britain, the system is based on the principle of decentralization, the units of

local government like the parish (village in England) and the borough (town or district)

. -:_ _,,»,c inHpnendentlv. The central government exercises administrative and

vernment system is centralized, tnai is me tcuum guwiiuuvi.* ,~e

die arrondissements (departments) and the communes (parishes, villages). The heads of
the local government are controlled and directed by the central government. Switzerland,
a small country, is divided into cantons which manage their own affairs somewhat like
local bodies. Very effective fundamental (basic) rights of the people are in operation all
the time. Almost all the local bodies systems in these and other enlightened countries are
working well because (i) the countries have a solid, long tradition of democratic
development; (ii) most of the people are educated; (in) the people are economically well

off and satisfied.

In contrast, our country, unluckily (i) does not have any solid tradition of democratic
development; (ii) most of the people are uneducated, and many of the educated ones are
engaged in anti-social and anti-state activities; (in) the people mostly are poor, backward
and dissatisfied. We have to study the operation of any system, at the grassroots level of j
local bodies as well as in the higher areas of elected assemblies and provincial and central
I

ministries together.

Historically, Ayub Khan and Zia-ul-Haq tried the LB systems in their own ways. They
could not work them well because they did not educate the common people suitably nor
did they bring about the much-needed economic reforms. The little of democracy they
introduced was deceptive (fake) and misleading. The present LB system is part of a
greater decentralization or devolution plan (= of transferring power from the central
bodies to the smaller units). Under the plan, efforts are being made to make institutions,
departments and local units like city and town administrations autonomous
(selfgoverning). The National Reconstruction Bureau (NRB) is responsible for initiating
(starting) the whole LB system.

The structure of the Local Bodies Government has the Union Councils (UCs) at the °ase.
The people elect the councillors directly. The higher levels of the structure are the Tehsil
Councils (TCs) and Zila (district) Councils (ZCs) whose Nazims and Naib Nazims are
elected by the Union Council members (called together the electoral college). Thus, were
elected and formed in the country in July and August 2001. The elections were t parties
and under separate electorates (that is, the major religious communities their own
members). The DCOs (District Co-ordination Officers) work between *ne Nazims and
Naib Nazims and the provincial departments of administration, revenue ( niaal”), etc. and
the police have been put under the Nazims. The DCOs are regular civil

ervants like deputy commissioners and commissioners. It means that the Nazims and

aib Nazims perform general supervisory or social functions while the technical or
240

B.fl. Cnglish Simple Grammar 5i Cornpo

professional government work is managed and practically controlled by the DCQ

government functionaries like earlier. Further, there is concentration or powe ^ functions
in the Nazims which they probably cannot exercise at ease. And this, ironi 11°’ works
against the decentralization basis of the whole system. Recently, Se ^ departments
like the municipal corporation, city development authorities, water sanitation authorities
and the like were put in the charge of the District Nazim.

On the face of it, the LB system contains many of the important functions, und criminal
and civil law, that the provinces alone are supposed to perform. As a result wh ^ the
otherwise historically ineffective and inefficient provincial assemblies com’e mi* being,
the issue of provincial autonomy will come to the fore (in front of everyone)

Strong members of the assemblies, ministers and even effective civil servants may come
into direct conflict with the Nazims, who, with all their lack of knowledge and experience
and elitist (aristocratic) background can be (maybe erroneously) taken to be
representatives of the government in power. Some such problems, and many others, on
account of lack of co-ordination between different departments, for example, the railways
and road transport, the civil administration including the police and the agricultural
industrial and business community and incapacity of the Nazims to cope (deal) with all
the departments together, may arise.

The present national situation is extremely uneasy. Social evils like corruption,
smuggling, black marketing and terrorism have endangered national unity and the
country’s very existence. The introduction of a new administration or political system that
disturbs the social and economic system without immediate healthy results is unwanted
(or unwarranted) and undesirable.

However, if at all any new administrative or political system needs to be introduced or

dictatorship needs to be replaced with genuine democracy, some conditions cry for
fulfilment. Firstly, the present feudal (”jagirdari”) system in the country should be broken
up and replaced with a just social and economic order (arrangement).

Secondly, the masses (common people) should be educated as thoroughly as possible

mostly with funds released from the state sale of the properties of feudal lords, criminals,
corrupt politicians and dishonest government officers.

Thirdly, agricultural and industrial development of the highest order should be initiated
(started). The latest industrial and agricultural techniques should be adopted to raise
production. Information technology should be taught widely and should be put to use in
every department of national life. New dams should be constructed. With an
improvement and increase in manufactured goods, exports will jump to unbelievable
levels. The prices of commonly-used articles will come down. With educated and trained
manpower (workers & technicians) available in plenty, our farms, fields, manufacturing
centres and industrial units will add to the national income and wealth tremendously
resulting in general prosperity, peace and harmony.

The need of the hour is to introduce urgent reforms and changes from the top (the centre)
with the consent (agreement) of the provinces. These reforms may, in fact, look
revolutionary. Sut they are essential to (necessary for) the survival and life of the nation
and the cour. y. The loss of magnificent leadership at the top cannot be made good
through the unwise supply of petty and puny (ordinary and weak) leaaers at the bottom
who do not have the required ability or power to steer the ship of society to the land of
prosperous peace and happiness.

Writing

241

77. The Best Political System for Pakistan (or) The Need for Stability

bility or continuity in the progressive policies and actions of the government and

. is possible only in a suitable political, economic and social system. We cannot

Pe°Pct to achieve the highest levels of civilized life and cannot take ourselves to the

exf. ts Of progress if we do not have suitable and favourable political, economic and

social conditions inside the country.

The best political system is that in which the people can have the best leaders elected by

from time to time. These leaders should be able to form the government. And, this

1 ”vernment should be able to work for a definite period of time, say four or five years,

g°disturbed by any change if it functions well. Now, this kind of political system is the

residential one, the most acceptable and popular in the whole world and which has
successfully worked in the US for more than 200 years. In this system, the President is
elected for four years and he appoints his own ministers or secretaries. He works in close
association with the Congress (the two houses elected by the people). In this arrangement
he can pursue (follow) his policies for some years and the Congress cannot remove him
through a vote of no-confidence as the House of Representatives of the British Parliament
or the lower house of our Parliament or the Indian Parliament can remove the Prime
Minister. Because of our long connections (associations) with the Britishers we adopted
the parliamentary system, experimented with it and tried unsuccessfully to make it a way
of our political life. Ayub Khan experimented with the presidential system for about ten
years without trying to change the socio-economic set-up, and ended up with a corrupt
dictatorship. All this resulted in instability-quick fall of governments, dissolution of
assemblies, union councils and other bodies at lower levels.

If the Presidential political system looks more suitable, when can it work well in our
country? It can work smoothly on some conditions which if fulfilled, will give rise to
political stability, social equality and economic justice at the same time.

First of all, the people as a whole should be educated well. The literacy rate will have to
be raised to around 95 per cent so that the people can not only read and write, but have
reasonable knowledge and understanding of the basic sciences and arts. The common
people will have to be made quite fully conscious of the political, social, economic,
military and religious truths and realities so that they may be able to understand the
abilities and capacities of the candidates for the assemblies and local bodies. Secondly,
the feudal system should be completely broken up and abolished in the country. No big
landowner or landlord in the villages should be allowed to own so large farms as they do
today. The villagers then will be able to study independently and think rightly and vote
judiciously (with good judgement). Thirdly, the country should have a thorough social
security system in which all deserving (capable) people can study and earn properly and
no class or person can exploit (take undue advantage of) any other class or person on the
basis of wealth, power or position. The ill and retired people could also be given adequate
(suitable) allowances from a common national fund.

ft is, then, quite clear that we need a just (equitable) political economic and social system
in the country in which democracy can grow and develop (can flourish). It is entirely
wrong to say that the country at present has any kind of suitable system of lift w»ich can
bring about a big social change for the betterment of the people. And, likewise.
1 ’s foolish to claim that we have a democracy comparable to the true democracies in th
242

B.fl. nglish Simple Grommor & Compos,

world today, for example, the American, British, French, Canadian, Australian Japanese.
^

78. How We Can Develop (Modernize) Pakistan (or) Pakistan and The New
Millennium or The 2l” Century

In this world of competitions, conflicts and confrontations (positions of facing e other) it

is necessary for any honourable country to be strong and stable. What is th meaning or
significance of strong and stable this essay will make clear. The millennium ^ the 21st
century demands success on our part.

Now, the world is divided into sections or parts as far as development or progress is
concerned. We have the G-7 group of the most advanced countries, that is the US, Britain
Canada, France, Germany, Italy and Japan. Then there are other industrial powers like
China, South Korea, Singapore, Holland, Czechoslovakia, Russia and Switzerland. The
group of developing or under-developed countries include our own country, India
Bangladesh, Iran, Indonesia, Turkey, most of the countries in the Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIS) which replaced the Soviet Union* for example, Uzbekistan
Tajikistan and Azerbaijan and most of the African and South American countries. Where
does Pakistan stand in all these groupings and arrangements of strong and weak
countries?

There is no doubt that our country at the turn of the century has not made the required
headway (progress) that it was supposed to make after independence. Our people are
mostly poor, underfed, uneducated and uncultured. Industry and agriculture are in pretty
bad shape (at a very low ebb or level). Internal and external trade both are far from
satisfactory. The law and order situation leaves much to be desired. Politics is outwardly
and inwardly dirty, and politicians mostly do not come up to the required standards of
decency, ability and capability. Administration and public insiitutions are soaked in
corruption and malpractices. We do not find the hold of religion and morality to be
getting any stronger because of the attitudes of the people which are, in the main,
materialistic, worldly and selfish. In this social and national situation, what can we do?

Firstly, if we really want to flourish (prosper) in the 21st century with pride and hope, we
shall have to change our social, economic and political system. The outdated, outmoded
and outlandish feudal (”jagirdari”) system will have to be given up or modified (changed)
so thoroughly that the millions of village farmers, labourers and workers have nodonger
to depend on landowners or landlords for their earning or living. The lands in possession
of hefty (big and strong) landowners should be distributed among landless workers
carefully and judiciously. It is good that some form of agricultural taxation has been
discussed or introduced, but, more than this, we think that too big land holdings in the
hands of a few should not be allowed. [It may be noted that the kind of land re forms
being suggested here started to be introduced in Europe in the 1^ century...See how far
behind the advanced world we are!\ Side by side with this, the doors to all kinds of
education to the working village populace and their children should be thrown open. The
funds collected from land transfers from the fat landowners, from taxation and from
proper cultivation of land, should be used at the start for education mostly.

In the towns and cities, simultaneously (at the same time), the biggest traders,
industrialists and capitalists, should be made to part with sizeable parts of their wealth for
the education of workers, labourers and uneducated common people. Government funds
can be spent, side by side, through dependable agencies, for this purpose. International
agencies like the UNO can be associated in this process.

UJnting

243

A crash programme (for the quickest results) aimed at equalization and universal

. cation, as outlined above, can awaken the whole nation to its responsibilities as an

dependent nation. A short period of national reconstruction, say, four or five years, at

*? j^st, will ensure (guarantee) progress, prosperity, hope and success in all fields of

Secondly, we have to develop our industry and agriculture by means of (through) proper

lanning and action. We should invest our public (government) and personal funds in
^ndustries which can meet internal demand and bring a lot of foreign exchange through

xports. In this connection, the question arises why can’t we have the best cotton, sports,
wood, electronic, cycle and car industries when South Korea, Singapore and Taiwan
(bavipg no more resources than ours) are moving far ahead in these fields? Agriculture
should be mechanized as much as possible, and the labour released on farms should be
employed in village and city industries.

Thirdly, scientific education, research and training should have a very high place in the
scheme of national reconstruction. Scientific centres of higher learning and technological
advancement with research programmes should be set up in all parts of the country.
Atomic energy for peaceful purposes should be used as far as possible. For example, for
power (electricity) generation (production), our atomic researchers can develop new
equipment for better results. We can develop sophisticated (the most Modern) weapons
ourselves for our defence.

Fourthly, the whole political system should be examined by experts and men of learning
and intelligence to change it for the better. In our humble opinion, the present
parliamentary (British) system does not suit our requirements. We perhaps need a most
modern and efficient system which can be Islamic (to ensure the rule of the most pious
and able), American or presidential (to ensure stability) and Chinese (to ensure effective
and quick changes and reforms). We should provide means and chances to the most
learned and capable people to be our national leaders. Political parties, in the end, should
no more be more than two or three and which should be truly national and patriotic.

Fifthly, we should .have a national programme of population control. Quality mass

education should be such as to bring the people to understand that expanding families
beyond a certain point multiply (increase tremendously) social and national problems.

We should develop in our people through education, on the radio, TV and the press,
speeches of popular leaders, sermons in mosques and churches, the common feeling of
living in one country as a nation. This is more important than material gains even. With
strong attachment for each other, with love for our fellow citizens and love for the
country, our motherland, we should work together determinedly for truly great success.

79. Pak-Indian Relations

Pakistan and India with Bangladesh share a history of Hindu, Muslim and English rule °f
hundreds of years. After Pakistan and India became independent in 1947, it was expected
that the two countries would live in peace and progress economically, scientifically and
culturally to each other’s benefit. But, unfortunately, the Indian eadership conspired
(plotted secretly) with the Maharaja of Kashmir who, against the

shes of the Kashmiris, joined India. The Kashmiris rose in arms against this decision, w
^ey were actively helped by Pakistan militarily, the struggle turned into a freedom

*• India was forced to take the Kashmir issue (problem for discussion) to the UNO !ch
decided in favour of the Kashmiris for a plebiscite (direct voting). The Indian ”Her
Jawahar Lai Nehru promised in 1949 to hold a plebiscite in co-operation with
244

B.fl. english Simple Grommor 61 Cortipo

Pakistan and under the supervision of the UNO. Later, several times the Indians

rePeated

and reaffirmed this promise. But, they went back on (failed to honour) these promises
took steps to show to the world that Kashmir was a part of India for all time T Kashmiris
as well as Pakistan did not accept the Indian position regarding Kashmir a H demanded a
free plebiscite there. Now, this is the basis of the dispute between India an Pakistan, and
this has caused three wars between them.

The second war took place in 1965 when the Kashmiri freedom fighters (”mujahideen’”»
started an armed struggle against the Indian forces in Kashmir. India could not face th
force of the struggle in Kashmir, and so attacked Pakistan which was helping the
Kashmiris. After three weeks of fierce fighting, the problem of Kashmir remained
unresolved. The Tashkent Agreement was signed by the Indian Premier, Shastri, and the
President of Pakistan, Ayub Khan, in January 1966. Both the countries promised to settle
their disputes through discussion according to the UN resolutions. The India government
afterwards did not try to have the Kashmir problem solved according to the UN decisions
and the will of the Kashmiris. Thus the Kashmir problem continued to embitter PakIndian
relations.

In addition to stepping up its anti Kashmir activities in the West, India started interfering
in the internal politics of East Pakistan. It provided aid and arms to the East Pakistan
leaders who wanted to break away from Pakistan. In order to check Indian armed
advances there Pakistan engaged India militarily in Kashmir and on the western borders.
In this situation, with the communication links broken between East and West Pakistan
and the anti-Pakistan activities helped by India at a height in East Pakistan, the 1971 war
could not be continued practically. The Accord (agreement) was signed between Pakistan
and India in 1972 according to which both the countries promised to settle their
differences through peaceful talks (negotiations).

Pakistan tried her best to settle the Kashmir problem with India through direct
discussions according to the United Nations resolutions (decisions), but India continued
to declare that Kashmir was her internal problem and that Kashmir was its integral part.
Though travel and trade between the two countries were restored’ after the Simla
Agreement, relations between them could never be termed friendly. The quantum of trade
remained low and co-operation that could have started in science, technology, art and
literature was never forthcoming. Rising military expenditures continued to strain the
budgets of the two countries, and their economic condition did not let them attend
suitably to programmes of population control, industrial and agricultural development,
employment, health and education.
Three major developments in India and Kashmir were to further worsen (aggravate) their
relations. Firstly, India developed an atomic device and exploded it in Rajasthan in
1974. This proved that she was an atomic power and could be a great threat to Pakistan.
On the other hand, Pakistan’s nuclear (atomic) programme remained peaceful and
constructive, aimed at using the atom in medicine, energy production etc. India, on her
part, began propagating against the nuclear programme of Pakistan.

Secondly, the brave Kashmiri freedom fighters organized and started a highly
powerfularmed struggle against India in 1989. The Indian forces killed thousands of
Kashmirisdestroyed their properties and forced many to take refuge in Azad Kashmir.
Pakistan protested strongly against all this cruelty, but India wrongly blamed her for
helping the Kashmiris.

Writing

245

Thirdly- *e Indian government intentionally did not check the narrow-minded Hindus

m pulling down the historic Babari Mosque in Ayodhiya in 1992. Thousands of Muslims
were killed in India and many mosques pulled down. So were many temples A molished
in Pakistan? This showed how strong were the communal feelings in India against
Muslims.

\\o\\ can Pak-Indian relations improve? The answer is simple and direct. First, settle the

Kashmir problem to the satisfaction of the Kashmiri people. Second, stop the mad arms

ace between the two countries. Third, establish healthy trade and cultural links between

le two countries. It is in the interest of the people of the two countries to live in

friendship and peace after the solution of their long-standing problems.

The present situation, after the successful explosion of nuclear bombs by both the
countries, demands a quick rather urgent end to the most painful and dangerous disputes
between the two countries. Soon after the settlement of these disputes, they can sign a
nowar pact and a no first in the use of atomic weapons.

80. Pak-American Relations

Pak-American relations have acquired (come to gain) a special importance after the
collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, the end of the Afghan War, the new developments
in the Middle East, South Asia and the Far East and the terrorist attacks in the US in
2001. By all standards, the US is the only superpower today. Until China manages to
become another superpower in the 21st century, America will continue to enjoy a decisive
role in the military, technological, economic and political fields to the advantage or
disadvantage of weaker countries.

The 2001 terrorism in the US and the becoming of Pakistan a frontline state to combat
(struggle against) international terrorism has led to a special relationship with the US.
American sanctions on Pakistan have been removed and the free flow of loans, aid and
arms from international agencies has become possible. Now, it is up to the rulers to use
the new chances to the betterment of the people and advancement of the country.

In the very complex world scenario (the scene of situations and actions), we have to
develop a special relationship with America without letting her interfere with our internal
affairs and with our relations with other countries.

At the start, we may briefly review our relations with the US after Independence. Our
first Prime Minister visited America in 1949 in preference to the Soviet Union, and thus
started a chapter of close co-operation and collaboration between the two countries. From
’954 to 1965 Pakistan remained attached to defence pacts with America like the CENTO
(Central Treaty Organization) and SEATO (South East Asia Treaty Organization). After
*e 1965 war with India, against the American policies, Pakistan started moving towards
toe group of neutral or non-aligned countries (which were neither in the American nor the
Russian camp).

Pakistan helped America and China in coming closer and in developing permanent

’Plomatic relations around 1968. The relations between Pakistan and America looked
j|«ite friendly on the diplomatic level. But, in 1971 India invaded East Pakistan after g
concluded a defence pact with the Soviet Union. America did not help Pakistan in
manner> and *e regions between the two countries began deteriorating )- Pakistan was
continuing with her atomic energy programme for peaceful

tfr Wnicn America did not like. To show her disapproval of our nuclear policies, she °»
our economic aid.

ttl
246 B.fl. nglish Simple Grammar 61 Composif

Later, after the American-supported Iranian government of the Shah of Iran was toppied
(overthrown) through an Islamic Revolution and Russia invaded Afghanistan in 1979
America resumed (renewed) its economic and military aid to Pakistan around 1982. Afte’
the break-up of the Soviet Union and exit of Russian forces from Afghanistan, Arneric
once again cut off all aid to Pakistan and adopted an unfriendly posture openly favouring
India despite her advancing nuclear programme. After Pakistan’s attainment of the status
of a nuclear power in 1998, America became instrumental in promoting worldwide
economic sanctions against her.

It is very surprising that America, which has all along been condemning human rights
violations and acts of terrorism in Communist and Muslim countries, did not take very
seriously Indian criminal acts against the Kashmiris and Sikhs. In case of Kashmir
America did not pressurize India to hold a plebiscite in accordance with the Uhj
resolutions. Rather, she criticized Pakistan, and despite the gigantic Indian military
buildup she objected to Pakistan’s efforts to buy sophisticated (the.most modern)
weapons from China. She should have declared India an imperialist terrorist state in all
fitness.

In the present situation, when Pakistan is co-operating with the US in checking terrorism,
relations between Pakistan and America depend on some conditions. Firstly, America
should treat the developing countries, especially Pakistan and India, equally. She should
try to bring about a just balance of power between Pakistan and India by providing
technological help to Pakistan and by not opposing her nuclear programme. Secondly, she
should suspend all sorts of aid and assistance to India until India helps settle the Kashmir
problem justly. Thirdly, America should, no doubt, help Pakistan positively by promoting
its programmes of mass education, economic reconstruction and social equalization as
she did in Western Europe after the Second World War.* Fourthly, America should not
object to the development of our relations with any other country like China.

How can the US work for us and for herself? The US^ should co-operate with us by
writing off all the loans to us and by making the World Bank write off its loans to us. She,
together with the advanced Western European countries, should initiate (start) a
programme of swift transfer of her technology and scientific expertise (specialized
knowledge) to Pakistan on a massive scale. Side by side, a programme of investment in
industry and agriculture may be implemented, with the collaboration of Pakistani
industrialists and agriculturists, in all parts of the country. On top of all, with the active
participation of the UN, a national plan of education for all ”according to the needs of the
individual” may launched to hasten (accelerate) Pakistan’s entry into the territories of the
First World. Rather, the education programme may be taken up earlier than the other
programmes in active collaboration with Pakistani educationists and able people m
different fields of national activity like law, medicine and engineering.

A strong, stable and viable (strong enough to stand by itself) Pakistan will be a better and
effective friend of America. We, then, shall be able to provide help and guidance to in the
same way and shall be able to co-operate with her for the betterment of the less
developed parts of the world.

*Under the Marshal Plan which the US started in the late 1940s to help Europe to
economic recovery (aft* the devastation of the Second World War). In 1950 the
programme was broadened to include all areas of world opposed to the communists.

81. Pak-China (Sino-Pak) Relations h

Pakistan and China are in the same continent and have a common border in the nort j
They are the most friendly next-door neighbours having a brilliant record of success
friendship and neighbourliness.

Writing

247

We may briefly review the historical background of our relations with the People’s
Republic of China. Pakistan was the first Muslim country to recognize China on her .
Dependence in 1950. Since then the relations between the two countries have been m-
owing to the satisfaction of the Chinese and Pakistanis. In 1963 we settled our border
oroblems permanently with China by signing the border agreement. In 1978, the 2-lane
ii.weather Karakoram Highway was opened which promoted our friendship and trade
tremendously. With Chinese help we have been able to build the first Heavy Mechanical
rornplex at Taxila which produces heavy, machines for factories and engines like
locomotives (railway engines). Then we have built the Heavy Rebuild Factory at Taxila
to nroduce tanks and defence equipment in earnest. Diplomatically Pakistan has always
helped China to project its domestic reforms in all fields of national activity, for example,
its educational, cultural and economic programmes of national re-construction. Politically
Pakistan always supported China in her conflicts with India or America. So did China
stand by Pakistan in her wars with India. After China’s entry into the UNO in 1971, both
she and Pakistan acted together in resolving their own problems and those of other
countries.

In the energy field, China is providing us with nuclear power plants to generate (produce)
electricity. Several hundred Chinese engineers and technicians are co-operating with our
workers in our factories and electric plants to improve our efficiency and increase our
production. In addition to this, our foreign trade with China has been on the rise. Whereas
we export all that China needs in cotton or leather or other raw materials form us. we
import from China machinery and machine tools of all kinds. The sea as well as land
trade between our countries is growing day by day.

Internationally, Pakistan and China have been co-operating actively in struggling against
all kinds of aggressive and imperialistic (hegemonic) policies of the big powers like the
US, the former Soviet Union, Britain, France, etc. in Asia, Europe, Africa and Latin
(South) America. They both stand together for equality, brotherhood, non-alignment (or
non-attachment or neutrality), peaceful co-existence and peaceful solution of problems
between any two countries.

The closest relations between our two countries are evident (clear) in these ways. Firstly,

the leaders of both the countries often meet and discuss their policies and problems. Visits

of Chinese ministers here and ours there are always welcome. Secondly, both countries

adopt common policies in international agencies like the UNO. So their policies and

stands on Kashmir, Iran-Iraq war, Afghanistan, Bosnia, etc., have almost been the same.

Thirdly, trade has been continuously rising between the two countries. Neither China nor

Pakistan has raised trade barriers against the import of the other’s goods. China never
tries

sell her goods to Pakistan at high or unreasonable prices as certain advanced countries

ty to do. Fourthly, China has opened up its door to Pakistani scientists and technical

experts to learn its advanced technology and benefit from its scientific progress. As

explained earlier, Pakistan and China are collaborating in nuclear physics for peaceful

uses of atomic energy. Our able scientists are always ready to provide their research and

the fruits of their learning to their Chinese counterparts (that is, Chinese scientists
working

*e them). Fifthly, there are strong cultural links between the two countries that their

People respect and value. In ancient times Muslims travellers and scholars used to visit

, .”la and so the Chinese toured through Muslim states. They worked together in

Philosophy, science, history and medicine. There are millions of Chinese Muslims who

°°k at Pakistanis as their brethren, members of the same Ummah. Sixthly, the problems
^-,w B.fl. Cnglish Simple Grammar 5i Composite

faced by the Chinese and Pakistanis after independence were similar-poverty

unemployment, social and economic inequality, illiteracy, corruption, dangers of foreign
attacks, etc. Both the nations had sympathy for each other and so developed common
feelings.

At this juncture of history (in this state of affairs) when India has adopted an aggressiv
posture and stance (position or attitude) towards Pakistan and China and is making claims
on their territories, it is time both the countries established a joint defence arrangement
Both these brotherly countries have common interests and principles while India is trying
to emerge (come forth) as a mini superpower after her nuclear explosions in 1998, a
threat to the whole of Asia. Already she has displayed her monstrous terror in the
deployment (arrangement and positioning) of her forces, missiles, warships, air force
planes and atomic weapons on the land and sea.

Now, while our great neighbour, China is making incomparable progress in the economic
and military fields more than any other country, it is our great chance to develop closer
contacts with the Chinese to develop ourselves. For this purpose, our factory managers,
technicians, engineers, scientists and agriculturists can visit China on study tours oftener
than they do at present. If we establish joint Pakistan-Chinese study centres in both the
countries and associate the seats of higher learning with them, it will not be out of place,
but will rather be a giant step forward towards advancement.

Pakistan and China can look forward to a time when both will, through co-operation and
planning, be world powers like America and Britain. China managed to have almost
completely devoted and honest leaders after Mao Tse-tung who worked day and night for
her progress. We unfortunately could have very few such leaders. While the Chinese
developed and promoted a social, political and economic system according to their needs
we could only follow the parliamentary system of English which -only continued the
outdated and outmoded feudal (”jagirdari”) system and an unjust and backward-looking
capitalist system (to the great satisfaction of capitalists). As a result, China’s rate of
economic growth is perhaps the highest in the world and ours among the lowest. Let us
decide to be as great as China some day by putting our house in order and by changing
our social, political and economic systems. The present situation demands the
combination of the best aspects (facets) of the Islamic, Chinese and American systems.

After the terrorist attacks on America in 2001, and Pakistan’s readiness to co-operate with
the West, China should review its foreign relations with Pakistan and India. The need to
check Indian military and diplomatic designs by China is urgent. She should, by all
means, pressurise India to settle the Kashmir issue justly and to end her mud slinging on
Pakistan. Pakistan can still serve as a bridge between the West and China and the Far
East. and China should facilitate in the performance of this role.

82. The Kashmir Problem

The Kashmir problem is as old as the history of Pakistan and India for (because) soon
after independence in 1947 the Kashmir war started between the Kashmiri freedom
lighters and India. Pakistan fought on the side of the freedom fighters and forced India to
go to the United Nations and apply for a cease-fire. Both India and Pakistan agreed with
the UNO that the final status of Kashmir would be decided by a plebiscite (votes of all
qualified citizens). There was another war in 1965 between India and Pakistan over
Kashmir without any result, and Kashmir remained divided. The Kargil battle of 1999
could have resulted in India’s defeat in Kashmir, but the possibility of an atomic war
brought it to an end.

Writing

249

The most painful as well as hopeful development concerning Kashmir is the brave ggle of
the Kashmiri freedom fighters against India that started in 1991. It reached a
80111 dangerous point with the attack of the Indian soldiers on the Hazratbal shrine
^darga11’) in Srinagar in 1993. The struggle is continuing as thousands of brave young t-
hmiris have been killed and their properties destroyed. The most sufferers are the
Kashmiris themselves and it is they who are being destroyed. The Kargil battle has
unluckily had a negative effect.

If India does not grant the right of self-determination (right to decide their own future)

plebiscite to the Kashmiris, there are a few dangerous possibilities. Firstly, there can be

° dangerous war between India and Pakistan dragging other countries like Afghanistan,

tan and Saudi Arabia into it, and in the end inviting intervention (interference) by the big

powers

like the US, China and Russia. It will amount to widening the areas of war and

increasing total destruction. Further, both Pakistan and India will bring almost complete
destruction upon themselves pushing their economies hundreds of years behind the
present condition. And, if nuclear (atomic) weapons are somehow used, most of the
people will get killed.

Secondly, the continuing struggle of the Kashmiris will rob the United Nations
Organization and other world bodies of all their reputation and will teach all hard-pressed
people around the world that only armed struggle or war is the way to win independence.
This may result in the promotion of international terrorism side by side. A strong section
of the people inside any country can decide to start bombing public places and ambushing
(attacking by surprise) moving police force or army troops as is happening in occupied
Kashmir. All this will upset democracies like India itself several movements against the
state are already in progress in its provinces like the Punjab and Tamil Nadu.

Thirdly, the unsolved Kashmir problem will continue to embitter the relations of Pakistan
and India and force them to keep huge armies. Already the two countries are spending a
major part of their budgets on their armed forces. The people of the two countries cannot
enjoy the facilities of Modern life and cannot advance properly in education, science and
technology because of huge military spending. Besides this, the two countries cannot
move ahead together in business, culture and tourism. On top of it all, they cannot attend
to the diseases and ills of their poetical, economic and social systems.

Fourthly, the constant friction between Pakistan and India over the Kashmir issue gives a
chance to the big powers to take advantage of the explosive situation. Firstly, they sell
expensive weapons to the two countries and thus promote their own business. Then they
Play one country off against another according to their own choice and will. This leaves
the two countries at the mercy of the big powers, especially when they have to get aid or
arws form them. The Kargil settlement points to this very fact.

There are some solutions to the Kashmir problem that need to be considered seriously,
and the best one should be accepted and acted upon. Firstly, Pakistan and India can sit
across the table and mutually decide to partition Jammu and Kashmir at the present line
of c°ntrol. Then they may annex (join) the disputed areas already with them to their
territories. Secondly, the Kashmiris can decide through independent voting which country
toey will join. Thirdly, through some international agency like the UNO, Kashmir can
decide to become an independent country itself.

Now it can be easily understood that most of the Kashmiri people are Muslims and they
nave historical relations with the Pakistani people. They want to join Pakistan form the
250

B.fl. Cnglish Simple Grommor & Composition

heart. Then all the main rivers of Pakistan flow out of Kashmir into Pakistan, and the
mountainous ranges in the north are our natural borders between the Central Asian States
and China. The Kashmiris have ready markets in Pakistan for their fruits, handicrafts and
manufactured goods. Our roads to the north mostly lead to Azad Kashmir and Occupied
Kashmir. Thus, historically, geographically, culturally and commercially Kashmir and
Pakistan are continuity. It is in the interest of Kashmir and Pakistan together to become
one state.

Let the only superpower, that is, the US side with the Kashmiris as all democratic forces
are with them, and let all Muslims decide to help them actively to ensure their success in
their struggle against India which now symbolizes (stand for) a fight against aggression,
cruelty, injustice and brutality.

83. The Afghan Situation

1. The Introduction-Brief history of the Afghan war situation.

2. The main causes of the present Afghan crisis.

3. The main results of the Afghan civil war.

4. Some suggestions for the solution of the Afghan problems.

The Afghan crisis (time of great danger or difficulty) started when the revolutionary
leader Taraki killed President Daud and took control of the Afghan government in 1979.
The Russian (the then Soviet) troops entered Afghanistan, and according to Taraki’s
programme with them, Communist control was established. Very soon, the Afghan
freedom fighters, the Islamic ”mujahideen,” started intense (violent) guerrilla warfare
against the Russian army. Backed by Pakistan and other Muslim countries directly and by
America indirectly, the war was fought by the mujahideen for about ten years until in
1989 the Russian army had to withdraw from the country.

As it always happens, the groups starting fighting with each other when the common
enemy did not remain on the scene. The groups of the ”Mujahideen” headed by the late
Ahmad Shah Masud and those headed by Abdul Rashid Dostam got engaged in bloody
warfare. In 1992, Burhanuddin Rabbani became the President. But his own Prime
Minister Hikmat Yar and then General Dostam started fighting against him, and he was
ousted. The Taliban Pushtoon forces took control of most of Afghanistan.

Pakistan, Iran and Uzbekistan have been involved in the Afghan civil war after the
Russian withdrawal. Pakistan has supported the Hezb-i-Islami of the Talibans, Iran has
supported the Hezb-e-Wahdat of the late Commander Ahmad. Shah Masoud and
Uzbekistan has supported the Jumbish-e-Milli of General Dostam. In the latest war
situation developing in favour of the Taliban forces, several opposition forces and parties
including the Hezb-e-Wahdat and Jumbish-e-Milli joined hands and formed an alliance
(union) to defeat the Hezb-e-Islami. One party should have won the civil war to establish
peace and order. Now, the involvement of the West in the war scene creates the
possibilities of the downfall of the Taliban and the setting up of a new government.
However, it will be most desirable if a representative and popular government comes into
being. This government should not, in any case, be a tool of foreign powers whatever
they maybe.

The war situation is extremely dangerous for the Taliban. They cannot survive the attacks
of the Western powers led by the US. It will be a grave (serious) mistake on the part of
any other country as well like Russia to try to intervene in the volatile (boiling) wtt
situation. Another great need will be* to avoid like wild fire the approaches of India as,

Writing

251

firstly, India’s past is dirty and mirky (dark and suspicious) And, secondly, she has a
shameful past of fishing in troubled waters in a Kashmir or Afghanistan-like situation.

Now, some causes of the development of the Afghan war situation. The /Zrs/main cause
is the work of the past corrupt and inefficient governments of kings of the country. They
did little for the progress of the country.

The second main cause of the worsened Afghan situation is the long and useless
association of the Afghan governments with Russia and India. Russia (then the Soviet
Union) came to dominate Afghanistan completely which resulted in the war of
independence started by the ”mujahideen” in 1979. India tried to misguide the Pushtoon
speaking people on the two sides of the Afghan-Pakistan border by voicing her support
for the so-called Pushtoonistan province demanded by certain misguided Indian friends in
our Frontier Province. However, the Afghan war of independence drowned this demand
in the sea of woes (grief) and pains brought into existence by the follies of the Afghan
leaders acting partly on Indian advice.

The thirdmain and general cause of the Afghan crisis is the poverty, inequality, and lack
of education within the country. Most of the people are extremely poor with a hopelessly
low standard of living. Nevertheless (however), the small class of rich property owners
and merchants continued to live in comfort and luxury giving rise to feelings of
uneasiness and anger in the people.

The last cause of the heightened crisis is Afghanistan’s act of providing Osama bin Laden
and his organization refuge, camps and training facilities in the country. America and the
West consider Osama responsible for the terrorist attacks on her vital centres in
2001.
Millions of Afghan refugees took shelter in Pakistan, Iran and Uzbekistan after the start
of the war of independence that later developed into the civil war. No doubt, most of the
refugees returned to their homeland from the three countries after the Russian
withdrawal. The remaining refugees could not be tolerated at ease by the Iranian and
Uzbek governments and societies. Even in Pakistan quite a few refugees created new
social problems and contributed to illegal arms sales and anti-social activities.

After the fresh confrontation (angry opposition) between the LIS and Afghanistan, there
was a fresh influx (entry) of refugees into Pakistan. A very ugly situation has developed
for the whole region (large area), especially for Afghanistan and Pakistan. The West
should understand that the destruction of Afghanistan will be to no purpose.

No doubt, Afghanistan has cultural links with the central Asian states and Iran and they
have a right to develop brotherly relations with her. But, the economic and social
connections of Afghanistan with Pakistan are the most intimate, important and useful.
Firstly, the best markets for Afghan fruits and industrial products lie in Pakistan. The
outlets for Afghan foreign trade are Karachi and Gwadar. Secondly, the Afghans can
make the best use of the motorways in Pakistan for the transit of their goods. Further, the
network of highways in Afghanistan can be connected to the motorways and railroads in
Pakistan to promote inter-state trade in the whole region (big area) of central Asia. If the
newly independent Central Asian states divert the bulk (large quantity) of their products
to other countries through Afghanistan and Pakistan, there will be an unsurpassable
commercial and monetary growth. This will contribute to the prosperity of all the
countries opening possibilities of social and economic advancement. There can be other
factors justifying Afghanistan’s close linkage with Pakistan on the political and military
•i • B R english S,mpie Grammar 61 Composition

:is in the present situation when, alone, Afghanistan cannot stand against foreign ;es
eyeing her thirty-one provinces and natural resources greedily, ur leaders, scholars and
the mass media (newspapers, magazines, radio and television) d to make it clear to all the
Afghan people that their urgent need is to develop the most mate relations with Pakistan.
After the take-over of the country- by the Northern iance and establishment of almost
complete American control, we should reconsider foreign policy and try to open new
avenues of relationship with the ruling powers in

jhanistan.

84. South Asia (P.U.)

The Introduction-The geographical location of South Asia. The resources of the region
(large area). Pakistan’s position in South Asia. India’s role and her relations with other
countries.

he grand Indian Ocean washes the shores of Pakistan, India, Sri Lanka, the Maldives I
Bangladesh. Together with these, Nepal and Bhutan make up much of South Asia. In t,
these seven countries are members of the now famous SAARC (South Asian sociation for
Regional Co-operation). South Asia is truly thickly populated as it has :-fifth of the
world’s total population.

is part of South Asia, we can feel the size of the region and the resources that it ssesses.
India, Pakistan and Bangladesh in themselves were called a sub-continent that
1 all the attributes (qualities) of a continent. It was vast, it had all the world’s climates in
different parts, had diverse crops, fruits, vegetables, mineral resources, forests, rivers
1 mountains and a frightening population. Now add to this sub-continental landmass the
ources and work force of Sri Lanka, the Maldives, Bhutan and Nepal. So, we have rice,
eat, cotton, oranges, bananas, fish, iron, silver, gold, uranium, diamonds, oil, gas and ny
other resources that are needed for all kinds of commercial, industrial and scientific
ivities. The varieties of climate from hot cold and dry to wet give the taste of the entire
rid topography (geographical features) in the form of mountains, plains, seas and ers.

’akistan’s position is undoubtedly central to the whole South Asian region as, it acts as a
dge between the Middle East and Central Asia. Then, Pakistan itself bridges China and
uthwest Asia and West Asia and East Asia as well. So, geographically, commercially,
litically and militarily Pakistan occupies a central position in the region. If we consider
• sea and land routes, the easy movement of men and goods along the land surface and
icoasts of Pakistan from the eastern countries including India to the western countries
eluding Iran, the importance of Pakistan can well be imagined, fowever, for all its
resourcefulness and vastness. South Asia is in an unhappy state tuation), almost
hopelessly caught up in many political and economic problems and ils.

Costly, the most painful and destructive political problem of Kashmir has continued to
ison the relations of the two important countries of the region. India has, through the t
fifty years, kept Kashmir with it forcibly against the will of the Kashmiris. Therefore, ’
Kashmiris have struggled for freedom and Pakistan and India have fought wars with
•astrous consequences (horrible results).

Secondly, the Afghanistan civil war is a constant source of trouble and worry to kistan
and the rest of the world, especially the UN. The possibilities for our trade with ’ Central
Asian states through Afghanistan have been affected very adversely (badly).

253

6ssoV Writing

The migration of millions of Afghan refugees to Pakistan and the birth of the heroin and
kalashinkov culture, terrorism, sectarianism and other social evils in the country are
directly linked to the Afghan situation. The SAARC countries cannot deal with the
Afghan crisis because of their own national problems and differences with each other.

Thirdly, the rise of Hindu extremism, fundamentalism or nationalism or religious

intolerance is a constant cause of conflict between the Hindus and Muslims in the
country. This conflict resulted in the demolition of the Babri mosque and large-scale
disturbances and killings in India a few years ago. Now, this problem of religious
extremism or terrorism in India needs to be urgently and actively attended to by the
SAARC countries and other world bodies.

Fourthly, the internal Tamil uprising in Sri Lanka and unsuccessful efforts of the Indians
to help in crushing it have kept the Sri Lankans hanging between bloodshed and false
hopes of peace. The Sri Lankans are essentially (basically) peace living, and the
bloodshed caused by the fighting groups opposed to the government should be a main
item for consideration on the agenda of the world bodies.

Fifthly, a common problem of the smaller South Asia countries is to check the growing
desire of India to become a mini-superpower of the region and then to dominate (or
subjugate) and crush others. Thus, she has tried to establish her hegemony (controlling
influence) over Bangladesh in the matter of distribution of the Ganges water between the
two countries, hi her relations with Nepal, she has tried to have an overriding control over
Nepal’s foreign trade and internal rule. In her relations with Pakistan, she has tried to
tease her out of power through nuclear blackmail. All these countries, one after another,
have tried to restrain (check) India’s growing dominance in their own ways.

Now, is the time, after the atomic explosions and nuclear preparations by India and
Pakistan, to establish a true balance of power, equality, peace and justice in the whole
South Asian region. India has serious ambitions (high hopes) of becoming the strongest
naval power in full control of the Indian Ocean, the mightiest air power, except of course
China, to control all the skies of the area and the deadliest atomic power (except China)
to threaten all the states of complete destruction. These should be checked actively by the
old and new international political and social organizations.

The future of South Asia will be dark indeed if the countries of the region fail to settle
their difference through natural dialogue and discussions. After the settlement of the
external differences, the solution of the internal problems of the countries will be easier
and speedier. Especially in the economic field, there is need to initiate (start) rapid
development and programmes of mass education to bring the countries to a higher level
of national existence. ^

85. Good and Bad Manners (P.U.) ,>>

1- The Introduction-The manners and habits of a person tell a great deal about his
Personality.

2- People like a person having good manners. How he behaves.

3. Benefits of having good manners.

4- People dislike a bad-mannered person. How he behaves.

5- Some results of having bad manners.

”• The Conclusion-It is to our benefit to have good manners.

The manners and habits of a person tell a lot about his personality. We often form (shape)
our opinion of a person after meeting him and observing his manners.
254

B.fl. 6nglish Simple Grommor &

ipos>’

People like person having good and pleasing manners. They like his behaviour. Sucu
person talks, behaves and meets others in a sweet way. Firstly, he greets other people
wi,3 are older than he, or are known to him. He shows proper respect to his elders. °

A good-mannered person tries his best not to injure the feelings of others. He nev makes
a show of his ability or learning or wealth to make others feel lowly. He does n^ mind the
faults of others. He knows that all human beings make mistakes and have the’
weaknesses. So, if a person displeases or troubles him, he does not get angry.

Good manners like the ones described above make real friendship and love possibl
Friendship and love between two or more people will continue long if they are well
behaved. Good manners make co-operation possible. If the people at a place behave well
and are helpful to each other, they can co-operate in all possible ways.

People do not like a person with bad manners. They dislike his behaviour, his way Of
talking or meeting others. Such a person displeases others with his manners and habits.
He does not properly entertain them. At his place of work, he does not receive visitors in
a pleasant way. He does not listen well to them and does not satisfy them with his replies.

A ill-mannered person is often proud in his behaviour. He makes a show of the things that
he possesses or of his knowledge. He does not have patience for (ability to control his
anger at) the faults of others, and gets angry very soon.

Bad-mannered people cannot continue to be friends for long. They mind each other’s
faults and begin disliking each other sooner or later. They do not like to help others in
difficulty, as they are selfish.

It is to our benefit to have pleasant manners. Others will like us and our company the
more for our attractive manners. We should try to give up (get rid of) repelling manners
and ways.

86. Courage (P.U.)

1. The Introduction-Two kinds of courage-physical and moral.

2. Moral courage is of a higher quality.

3. Both moral and physical courage are needed for success.

3. The Conclusion-Have courage to say and what is right and fair.

Often people speak of two kinds of courage, that is, physical and moral courage. Physical
courage means readiness to face dangers, to fight against difficulties and to make a brave
struggle.

Moral courage is of a higher quality than physical courage. It means courage to speak the
truth and to do the right thing without caring about the results. It also means readiness to
accept one’s faults or mistakes. We make use of strength of character while showing
moral courage.

Any person who wants to succeed well in life should have physical as well as moral
courage. He should be ready to face dangers and difficulties physically. And he should
also be ready to express his ideas and beliefs openly. If he can show outer strength of the
body, he should also be able to show inner strength of character. He should always be
ready to support truth and justice.

A truly courageous person succeeds in life sooner or later. If he does not succeed in
achieving his aims for some time, he does not lose heart, and goes on trying to achieve
them. For example, a student may not be able to pass his examination in his first
attemptHe may pass it very easily and well in his second attempt. A general may be
defeated in a certain battle. He may succeed in another, bigger battle at another place. A
trader may

^.-oY Writing

1 .jffer great losses in business for some tune, but he may have profits some time later.
Thus, all these people succeed through courage to face failures in life. Courage is needed
by any person who wants to do anything really new. A scientist eeds courage to make an
invention. He goes on making efforts for a long tune to invent discover something new.
He fails in his efforts a number of times. Yet he does not get .Appointed. He continues
trying in a courageous way till he really succeeds. A player u-s to struggle hard to become
famous. He may face defeat a number of times. Yet, if he has courage he goes on making
efforts to play better. He may begin winning matches and

become a star.

^ nation as a whole needs courage to maintain (keep up) its independence. A truly
•courageous nation is always ready to fight against any country which attacks it. It even
tnes to help other countries if their independence is in danger. It lives with honour and
wants other nations to live thus. In no way does it make a negative use of courage. It does
not use force against any country to trouble it or to occupy any part of its territory.

We should have the courage to speak and do what is right and just. We should also have
the courage to tell others when they are in the wrong.

87. Hopefulness-Optimism
Hopefulness is a mental condition in which we expect good results of certain

happenings and situations, and feel happy about them. Optimism is a way of thinking

which makes us look at the bright side of different situations and makes us expect the
best

possible results. When we are optimistic, we are cheerful, inwardly happy and hopeful.

.And, when we are in.this condition, we can think, plan and work to the best of our

capacity (or capability).

What is hope if we can describe it psychologically? According to William McDougall, it

is one of the greatest forces that operates in the mind-something that enters into the
structure of character. Hope is in fact associated with desire and love. Tennyson wrote of
”the mighty hope that makes us...”

According to a psychologist, hope increases the activity of desire. It helps us in facing

troubles and misfortunes. It always makes the future look brighter than the present. That
is why Bertrand Russell gave one main reason for the struggle and suffering of a person
or nation over a long period-hope for the future. If we do not entertain any hope of a
bright future, we might not make any serious, long and continuous efforts at all.

Let us consider the general causes of hopefulness or optimism. Firstly, the qualities that a
child inherits (gets at birth) from his parents and forefathers determine his mental
condition a great deal. There are some qualities like hopefulness, cheerfulness, peaceful
nature, hopelessness, sorrowfulness, quarrelsomeness, and so on which are part of one’s
°f a person is good or evil, and surely it is very difficult to change it. Thus, if we are
happy and hopeful by nature, we may be like this for most of our lives in favourable and

unfavourable conditions of life.

Secondly, family life at home is, largely, responsible for our hopeful or hopeless attitude
towards life. If a child is bora into a peaceful, happy and contented (satisfied) family, it
can grow up into a boy or. girl with an optimistic or hopeful outlook on life. With
happiness and hope all around in the home, how can a member of the family avoid being
hopeful in life? The income of the parents, facilities in the house, proper education of the
children and good relations of the members of the family with each other and with other
relatives and with neighbours surely help in the formation of a happy family outlook.
jtoo 6 fl. nglish Simple Grammar & ^OrnPOsiHon

Thirdly, the social conditions (environment) in which a person lives affect his feelinao
and thinking a lot. If a person lives in a very backward part of the country with narrow
roads, broken houses and dirty markets, he will naturally not feel socially satisfied. When
’ the other people around him are badly off (poor), unemployed and dissatisfied he at
least will share their unhappiness even if he himself happens to be well off (prosperous).
If, on the other hand, the social surroundings are favourable and the people are happy and
satisfied, one living amidst them will also feel happy.

Fourthly, the chance of progress in society, employment opportunities, expanding

housing facilities and a proper price level keep all the people happy and hopeful. 77^
economic and social situation in general enable young people to get employed and
married in tune and to start their active service or business careers in the prime of life
This is what adds to general and individual (personal) happiness.

Fifthly, the political situation in the country is a great determinant (something that
determines or decides) of the level of general and individual happiness and optimism.
Who will not like to have a strong, stable and efficient political system like that of the
US, Britain, Holland or Switzerland? Who will not like to share the national glory of
politics with remarkable politicians of memorable deeds and unforgettable achievements
like Abraham Lincoln, Winston Churchill, Kemal Ataturk and the Quaid-i-Azam? With a
grand, successful political system and with dynamic (full of activity and new ideas)
leaders, the country progresses by leaps and bounds and the fellow citizens feel happy
and satisfied. The people are individually and socially hopeful and optimistic.

Social tragedies like fires, accidents, earthquakes and wars are in plenty. Personal
tragedies like diseases and deaths in families are no fewer. Frequent (happening
repeatedly) crimes and terrorist acts are often unavoidable because of the inner
weaknesses of human beings, social mechanisms and the policies of other countries. The
people can face these bravely if they have religious faith and moral strength and enjoy
social peace and harmony. In this state (condition) of mind, they continue to remain
hopeful (optimistic).

Thus, we can say that high hopes and expectations are the result of complex social and
personal causes. Of course, we can never be hopeful if we are not inwardly satisfied and
socially happy.

88. Character is Destiny (Fate) (P.U.)

World history proves that the greatest and lasting achievements and successes of human
beings have come through the strength of their character and knowledge. Just as
knowledge is power, character is the ability that tells us how to use this power and for
what purposes. In our opinion, character and knowledge are inseparable for the
accomplishment of great, noble deeds.
Let us discuss how a high, noble and thoroughly positive character can be developed.
Firstly, it is a fact that character is inherited (got from one’s parents at birth) to some
extent. We have often heard of a person being spoken of as noble-minded and good- .
leaned or good-natured. There lies something in the inner being of an individual that
:annot be changed for the better or for the worse by any kind of company, education or
raining. Unfortunately (by bad luck) there are born devils and born cheats who would
Iways think and act negatively however much you might teach, train or enlighten them.
>uch people may not be many. However, some of them may be negatively gifted or
reative, and if they decide to develop their qualities (talents) negatively, character can
ecome destiny for themselves and society. For example, Hitler and Mussolini were such

UlrlCing

257

fuses. Those people who are naturally noble-minded can be taught and trained for

£ . je purposes in several different ways, and they can prove to be useful and fruitful for

I? Jr families and for society as well. If a few of them happen to be unusually gifted by

ture or are creative, and they develop their virtues, their character surely becomes

H stiny f°r themselves and for all those connected with them.

Secondly, we should consider the factors that generally affect character development.
These are the social surroundings or environment in which a growing person or a student
lives. The atmosphere of the place determines character in this sense. For example, if a

tndent lives in a house surrounded by traders, merchants and dealers, he watches their
activities day and night and is sure to develop a commercial attitude towards (or outlook
on) life in some ways. He can become materialistic, and also selfish, if he gets interested
• ^eni. If he remains away from his surroundings, say in a college hostel, he can develop
another kind of social and mental attitude. A person living in the company of religious
scholars and men of learning, with books and reading materials all around, will form an
intellectual attitude to some extent at least. The immediate atmosphere of the home, the
activities and ideas of the parents and relatives, in this sense, become the most important
in relation to the student’s character.

Next, to affect character development are the political and economic conditions of
society. If the political leaders are of high character and noble conduct, their thoughts,
actions and behaviour become shining examples for all fellow citizens. The
characterformation of students, especially, is affected. Then, if the country is
democratically well established, that is, when in it democratic institutions are respected
and promoted, there can be an open atmosphere of discussion, argument, agreement and
disagreement. The minds and hearts of young people can be positively influenced and
their characters can develop depth and flexibility. If the economic situation of the country
is hopeful, agriculture and industry are expanding and jobs are plentiful, positive
character development is more possible. The people develop a happy attitude and a work
philosophy of effort, struggle and competition. That is why the general character levels of
the people the democratic advanced countries like the US. The UK and France in terms of
ideas, action and aims are very high. The high individual characters put together form a
Grand National character which determines national destiny or fate. The superpower and
world power status, enjoyed by America and other states, is on account of the direct
connection between character and destiny that is exhibited by their people in thought and
behaviour.

Destiny, then, is the result or outcome of character whether it is of an individual or a

nation. Our own characters and the national character in general will lead us to individual
and national successes, result 01 the use of the scientific method based on
experimentation and calculation. This scientific approach has affected the social sciences,
and, as a result, social situations and problems are now studied realistically and
scientifically more than realistically and philosophically. However, the value of the
idealistic approach to life is not lessened (reduced) because all great societies fix high
ideals (or aims) for their achievement through a long and difficult struggle. It is after the
achievement of these weals that scientific, industrial and mechanical progress becomes
meaningful and Purposeful. America achieved its noble ideals of democracy and social
justice first trough a long, difficult struggle and then gained spectacular (very impressive)
successes j? the scientific and technological fields. This applies equally well to the
People’s Kepublic of China that is expected to be the second (expected) superpower of
the 21st century.

to the Modern context, two systems of idealism are needed by us in our countryand
national. Personal idealism should prompt (move) us to achieve our high
B.fl. english Simple Grammar & Composition personal aims in society as teacher,
scholar, writer, scientist, office or factory worker soldier or any kind of professional. This
should make us successful through effort by ” improving our ability and efficiency.
National idealism should be reflected in our literature, the mass media (newspapers,
radio, TV) and speeches and talks of our main political leaders. Our people will act to
realize (achieve their personal and national ideals well if they are properly educated,
rightly guided in different directions by teachers and leaders and are strong religiously
and spiritually.

89. The Importance of History (P.U.)

The study of history is informative as well as instructive. It is a mirror in which passing

cultures and civilizations are reflected clearly with comments of historians. [Culture
means ”the customs, beliefs, art, music, and all the other products of human thought.” ft
indicates attitudes to life. Civilization means an advanced stage of human development
marked by a high level of art, religion, science, and social and political organization. It
indicates the developed political organizations like government communications,
industry, commerce, roads, buildings, etc.] There are two periods of history-the
prehistoric time (before six thousand years) when writing was not possible to .record
events and the historic time during which recorded events were available. The pre-
historic or unrecorded time is recreated through the stone tools, weapons, cave paintings
and carvings, bones of men and animals, etc. left by prehistoric men. When we read
world history, we read about these times and come to understand how, from an open air-
life under trees and near rivers and lakes, man has reached the present civilized condition.

Firstly, by reading world histories like ”The Outline of History” by H.G Wells and
”Peoples and Nations” by Mazour we gain a bird’s eye-view of the rise and fall of all
great civilizations and empires from the ancient Egyptian, Persian, Chinese, Greek and
Roman to the end of the British Empire in the 20 century. We can compare the historical
growth and working of the main social, political and economic systems like the
democratic, capitalistic, communist, the Fascist (of Hitler and Mussolini) and the Islamic
systems in different parts of the world. We can study the causes, courses and results of
amous wars like the famous Islamic wars and conquests in the 7* and 8th centuries, the
wo World Wars and other smaller wars like the Vietnam, Arab-Israeli and Indo-Pak vars.
We can study the causes, progress and results of revolutions in different parts of the vorld
like the French, American, Russian and Chinese. Political movements like the reedom
struggles in the colonies of the European powers in Asia, South America and Africa can
be studied and compared. Our own freedom movement in India has a long istory and
deserves to be read in the context of world history. Now, the Palestinian truggle in the
Middle East and the Kashmir freedom movement against India are ecoming a part of
history and will inspire future generations to brave deeds. The latest evelopments of
world terrorism remains to be studied in depth. Secondly, history is a study of great and
unusual individuals. It is a fact of history that reat and able leaders take a country to the
greatest heights of progress. Who can’t tiderstand the fact that the Quaid-i-Azam and
Liaquat Ali Khan by force of their ”rsonalities and ability won Pakistan for us with the
support of their Muslim followers? andhi and Nehru were, in a large measure, responsible
for the independence of India, braham Lincoln, the President of the US kept his country
united through a most mgerous civil war. Kemal Ataturk revolutionized his country so
thoroughly that it ’came the most powerful country of the Middle East and a terror for the
Soviet Union, inston Churchill was the main force to help Britain win the Second World
War. story, in this sense, is a picture gallery of great men and women tc enable us to
derstand, through comparison, where our present leaders stand, what their qualities and
pacities are and whom we should elect. Carlyle said in ”Heroes and Hero Worship”-’ he
history of the world is but the biography of great men.”

259

gssoy Writing

Thirdly, the history of the world, or for that matter of different countries, is also the
history of ideas. According to H.G Wells in ”The Outline of History,” the history of the
world is, in essence (in actual reality), a history of ideas. If we look at religious history, or
at the progress of religions through the ages, it is ideas of prophets [like those of Jesus
Christ and Hazrat Muhammad (peace be upon him)], of saints (like Gautama Buddha and
Hazrat Data Ganj Baksh) and of religious scholars (like Maulana Rumi, Maulana
Maudoodi and Imam Khomeini) that have determined the courses of events and social
movements. The ideas of liberty, equality and fraternity (brotherhood) lay at the basis of
almost all revolutions Democratic ideas lay at the basis of the political and constitutional
development of Britain, France and America. Communistic theories determined political
and social developments in East European countries including the Soviet Union and in
China. Again, the flood of democratic ideas swept the Soviet Union (now Russia) and
brought about its disintegration and division into independent states. All the historical
development of capitalism and communism or any other social system is based on the
growth of certain ideas. History makes us abler wiser and maturer through lessons in big
and small permanent and temporary, new and old ideas emanating (coming out) from
holy books or extraordinary minds.

History, in fact, gives us to understand the growth in consciousness of man in society

through the ages. Our ancestors (forefathers) were conscious of scientific, philosophical,
social and other truths relevant to their age just as we are conscious of these in ours.
History, thus, i$ a study of the changing rainbow of consciousness from period to period.

Fourthly, the true history of a country helps us to understand the condition (state) of a
society from bottom to top (vertically as far as the different classes are concerned) and
from one place to another, geographically, politically and socially (horizontally as far as
different institutions, cities, towns, factories, offices, etc. are concerned). T.B. Macaulay
comes close to what we are saying here in ”The Historian”: ”He (the perfect historian)
shows us the court, the camp, and the senate. But he also shows us the nation ... laws,
religion, education...”

A successful historian is, in fact, one who writes history freely. He should be a man of
knowledge, but, at the same time, able to write history without favouring any country,
class or individual and without opposing any-he should be impartial.

90. Idealism (P.U.)

”Idealism” is the state (condition) of mind in which we desire to have the best, the most
perfect and the most beautiful of anything. We are, thus, idealistic when we desire or try
to live according to our ideals (high aims) or standards. Often our idealism or idealistic
attitude or behaviour (when we think or behave idealistically) is far removed from the
realities and facts, and we are impractical in our approach to life. Idealism is, therefore,
opposed to realism or naturalism.

In this reflective or philosophic discussion, it will be better if we consider the basic

reasons for one’s being idealistic. Firstly, we all are living in an imperfect, cruel, selfish,
uncomfortable and corrupt world. Whenever there is some comfort or peace in sight,
some other problem or mischief raises its ugly head to cancel all pleasure. This goes on
happening in life. When social agencies or forces calm down in their opposition, disease
and death confront (face) us directly and lead us to defeat and disappointment. In all this
confusion and trouble, the imagination comes to our rescue (saves us) from the
destructive forces of society and fate. We begin to imagine a world free of problems of all
kinds to live in it for some time at least. Thus, idealism is born, and we desire to live and
enjoy life in the world of our making. Sometimes we want to have true friends, sincere
neighbours and well-wishers in place of the many kinds of fraudulent people we come
across irraaily life. We picture to ourselves an ideal friend or an ideal neighbour who will
always stand by us in every difficulty and will never deceive or cheat us. A person
pictures an ideal wife in his mind; another imagines an ideal partner in business, yet
another dreams of an

•jjt
260

B H. Cnglish Simple Grammar 61 Compos,t|

ideal doctor, engineer, architect or shopkeeper according to his or her experiences. TV,
common people shape idealistic images of some leaders in their minds, of those leade °
who would relieve them of poverty, injustice, unemployment and corruption, and \\ouh
start reconstruction and development programmes to take the country to the greate^
heights of progress and prosperity. Thus, we could think of a Kemal Ataturk or a
Abraham Lincoln appearing on the political scene to make Pakistan an advanced countn
in the true sense. This is personality idealism that raises images of perfect personalities in
our minds whom we would like to have in our midst to direct, guide and inspire (Or
encourage) us.

Secondly, many of us desire to be great ourselves, to do greatly what other thinkers

writers, philosophers, artists, scientists and politicians have done. We idealize our owri
powers and capacities and then imagine that some day we shall be as great and famous as
others are or have been. This we may call personal idealism. It surely makes us use our
powers and capacities to the maximum in order to perform grand deeds according to the
idealized pictures of ourselves in our minds. Sometimes we do succeed in raising
(elevating) ourselves to heights of success in various fields, and sometimes we remain as
ordinary (mediocre) as before. Personal idealism has, thus the benefit of moving us to
action from thought (contemplation) in the fulfilment of our desire to become great and
unforgettable in history. This kind of idealism led great warriors like Changez Khan and
Napoleon, dictators like Adolf Hitler and Joseph Stalin and leaders like Winston
Churchill and Mao Tse-tung to notable successes and tragic failures in the military and
political fields. Now terrorism is throwing up negative idealists.

Thirdly, idealism is related to social, political and economic aims or objectives of a nation
or country. If, for example, a nation is struggling to win independence from a foreign
power or powers, some of its citizens imagine or dream of a rosy independent future and
present it to the people in writings and paintings. Allama Muhammad Iqbal in our country
expressed this national idealism in his poems and speeches. The Quaid-iAzam translated
this idealism into practice, and achieved Pakistan. Imam Khomeini in Iran was the
greatest revolutionary in recent times that explained to Iranians their national and
religious idealism and successfully led the Iranian Revolution against kingship and
foreign powers to success. It is most difficult to make the people realize (understand)
their national and religious ideals, and then make them act to achieve these ideals through
a revolution. Other most impressive examples of this realization of national ideals and
their practical revolutionary achievement are the American Revolution of 1776, the
French Revolution of 1789, the Russian Revolution of 1917, the Chinese Revolution of
1949 and the Afghan War of Independence of 1979-92. It is correctly said that a
successful revolution is possible only when the social and national ideals are explained
well to the people by writers, thinkers, philosophers and leaders.

Idealism is surely opposed to realism or naturalism (the presentation in art and literature
of the world and people as they are). Science and technology, which have given us all the
comforts and facilities of modern life like the telephone, radio and TV, bicycle and car,
printing machines and computers and all the medicines, are the result of high scientific
ideals (aims or purposes).

91. The Modern Civilization

A civilization is a ”highly organized society with complex institutions and attitudes that
link a large number of people together.” Thus, our Modern societies are well organized
with complex systems of the police, the army, the civil service, agriculture, industry,
business, education, means of communication, telecommunications (telephone, wireless,
satellite communication), the mass media (radio, TV and the press), medicine,
engineering, science, commerce, defence arrangements and so on. The populations in big
and small villages, towns, cities and countries are living a ”civilized” life according to the

£ssov

261

available to them. Culture particularly is the totality of beliefs, religious and artistic s and
thoughts in a society. Thus, the religious, literary, artistic and philosophical

tterns of thought and behaviour determine the cultural refinement of a particular P~ciety-
Some thinkers equate civilization and culture and describe both more or less as ”a
Condition of human society marked by an advanced stage of development in the arts and
ciences and by corresponding social, political and cultural complexity.” Whatever the
meaning8 of the two terms may be, it is a fact that most of the people in modern societies
are cultured and civilized to varying extents except of course the completely backward
and ignorant living wretchedly in forests and deserts unaffected by the mass media.

The present essay is designed to examine the true worth of the modern civilization, as it
• s today, what it is doing for us, how we are making use of it and in what directions we
are moving historically.

Firstly, we cannot disregard the facilities and conveniences of life that are available all
around. Electricity and now atomic energy have changed the whole pattern of life. Our
homes and streets are well lighted, and we have changed the darkness of night into
brightness of the day. We have all sorts of electronic appliances like the tape recorder and
VCR to provide entertainment at home Atomic energy given us cheap electric power to
run factories and ships at ease. So do we have thousands of inventions like the car and
aeroplane, the calculator and computer, the tractor and tube-well engine and medicines
and surgical instruments that have given us pleasures and comforts that a hundred years
ago were only dreams.

Secondly, the facilities of printing and publication have made possible the spread of
cultural values. Now, in the advanced countries of the West, we can find a common kind
of culture because of the free exchange of ideas and writings which the printing press has
made possible as much as the mass media. It is only in the backward or less developed
countries that we find cultural differences so very prominently. It is so because modern
education has been kept out of reach of the common people who have at the same time
been kept burdened with outdated, outmoded and outlandish political and economic
institutions like feudalism (”jagirdari”) and class dictatorship. As a result, we would find
vast differences between the music, architecture (the art of building), marriage customs
and working methods of one undeveloped society and another. So, we can mostly find
cultural unity in the West giving them a common viewpoint in political and economic
matters and chances of working and progressing together. The eastern societies, with the
exception of a few, disrjlay cultural disunity, disorganization in political and economic
”totters and few chances of working together. Even when the less developed countries
acquire (get) the modern travelling, printing, broadcasting and telecasting facilities, they
cannot come together smoothly because of the political and economic barriers.

The conclusion that we, as a less developed nation, arrive at, is that the fruits of modern
civilization cannot bring us any lasting good unless we, in all the developing world (the
Third World), bring all outdated political and economic institutions to an end. What does
purism, for example, mean to a nation of extremely uneducated and backward people like
”lose living in the slums (backward areas of cities) and dirtiness?

The Modern civilization in the advanced West is not an unmixed blessing. The cleverness
of the advanced people has gone too far in using the scientific and mechanical ,acilities
for the development of weapons of mass destruction. There is the rise of moderrr
”ttperialism (domination of one country or countries by another country or countries) I
Wch means cpntrol of the natural resources and political and economic policies of the \
^developed countries by the more developed ones.

The developed countries themselves have distanced themselves greatly from moral and
Pjritual values (standards) in their zeal to advance materially, mechanically and

lentifically. Their dependence on the ways of Modern civilization, which means speed
262

B.fl. Cnglish Simple Grammar

to

in worldly progress, has made them give up the old precious values of selfless devof a
life of worship and prayer, love for other human beings and objects of nature. °n

While the constant threat of diseases like AIDS and cancer looms large (an threateningly)
and the danger of a nuclear (atomic) war constantly hangs over^t5 developed world, the
developments of modern civilization sometimes appear t K! meaningless. Surely, if the
world wants to enjoy and relish the sweet fruits of mod ^ civilization, it will have to
create a situation when: ^

(1) All the countries or societies are equally developed, (2) when science and machin are
used positively and beneficially, and (3) when the old moral and spiritual values of^n
societies (these being quite common) are practised freely. ’

Acquired immunity deficiency 5>7?dro/ne-disease that destroys all immunity or bod’l

resistance. ^

(F) The World of Islam

92. The Islamic System or Way of Life

1. The Introduction-Islam is a universal religion.

2. The meaning of Islam. Islamic law.

3. Islam and our private life.

4. Islam and our public life.

(a) God as the supreme ruler, (b) Broad bases (foundations) of Islamic public law.

5. Islam as a religion of peace justice and equality.

6. The Conclusion-Islam is a flexible religion, permits the use of reason or the mind.
Islam is a universal religion. It covers all the aspects (facets) of our life. It makes clear

that the basis of the otherworldly life is our deeds and actions in this world.

Islam means obedience or submission to the will of God. The will of God is expressed
clearly in the religious law. The Holy Quran is the supreme expression of the Islamic law.
Apart from the Quranic law, Islamic law includes old customs and traditions that are not
against our religion. The life of our Holy Prophet Hazrat Muhammad (may peace be upon
him), as a whole, his words and needs, is another important source of law, after the Holy
Quran.

Islamic law covers all the important aspects of our private life. It guides us about the
types of food we may or may not eat, the way we dress ourselves, the relations between
men and women, and so on. All these rules of private life go together with prayers and
acts of worship. We have to pray five times a day, keep fasts during the holy month of
Ramazan and perform other acts of worship like sacrifice at Eid-ul-Qurban. Thus, we live
remembering God all the time. Perhaps, we know about all this too well. Unfortunately,
we don’t fully act on the rules of private living given by Islam.

Islam is quite clear about our public life too. It means that it guides us about the duties of
the government and the State and our duties towards society. It also guides us about the
duties of society towards the individual (person).

Firstly, the Quran says that full or absolute (complete) power (sovereignty) belongs to
God. Therefore, all governments or States become agents of the supreme ruler, that is
God. As such, they have to obey the order of God and frame their laws according to u»e
Quran if they are truly Islamic.

Islam is a religion of true peace, justice and equality. It gives us clear directions in regard
to respect for each other’s rights in society. It asks us to help the poor and tft needy by
giving ”zakat” regularly. It asks us not to give and take interest. It asks us to o6 honest in
personal, public and business dealings.

Islam is a flexible religion. It permits us to make use of our reason or mind (to Pra j s
ijtihad) to suggest solutions for new kinds of social problems. Whatever laws and ru have
been given by it in concrete (definite) form are for our practical benefit. ^

We can say with certainty that Islam is a complete social and religious system. » c take us
to heights of perfection in this world as well as in the next.

UUritmg

263

93. ”Zakat” and ”Ushr” in Islam The Introduction-Meaning of ”zakat” and ”ushr.”
1 explanation of ”zakat” and ”ushr” with reference to the Holy Quran.
2- Advantages or importance of ”zakat” and ”ushr.”
3’ tiow can ”zakat” and ”ushr” be used for the progress of the country?
4’ The Conclusion-Let ”zakat” and ”ushr” be the foundation of our Islamic economic

of ”zakat” is ”growth and purification.” It is that ”growth” which is the ult of God’s
blessing. The giving of ”zakat” out of one’s money or property causes its wth It also
causes one’s inner or spiritual purification. The meaning of ”ushr” is ”tenth j^t” It is in
fact ”zakat” which is to be given out of the produce of agricultural lands. ^According to
the Holy Quran, every Muslim who is able to pay ”zakat” must pay it. paying ”zakat” is
an economic duty in Islam. It is the most important obligation (duty) after ”namaz” or
prayer.

Who can and must pay ”zakat”? Anyone who, among other things, is a Muslim, is an
adult, has enough money or trade goods whose value increases with time, must pay
”zakat” at the end of the year. ”Ushr” must be paid, even by a minor and even more than
once a year, whenever he gets the produce.

How much ”zakat” is to be paid? 2’/2 percent of the total assets like profit-giving bank
accounts, government certificates, insurance policies, etc. is ”zakat”. In addition to this,
different rates of ”ushr” for different kinds of agricultural produce, animal wealth, etc. are

there.

To whom ”zakat” is to be given? ”Zakat” is to be given to really poor people, beggars,

debtors (those who have to pay back loans), travellers, and so on.

The advantages of the ”zakat” system are quite obvious (clear). Firstly, rich and well-
todo people help the poor and needy and satisfy their needs. Secondly, they provide help
to hospitals, schools, libraries and different institutions for the progress and welfare of
needy people in different fields of life. Thirdly, when all or most people participate (take
part) in ”zakat,” they have a common Islamic feeling of doing their duty together. This
promotes national unity. Fourthly, when we please God and do our religious economic
duty honestly, He blesses us and increases (adds to) our wealth.

”Zakat” can prove to be a real blessing if it is used for productive and constructive
purposes to the permanent benefit of the poor. Then only will it encourage investment and
savings. Distributing money or commodities (useful things or articles of trade) among the
Poor and needy directly after taking them from the rich is not enough at all.

Let us make ”zakat” and ”ushr” the basis of our economy. If we make use of this Islamic
institution in an intelligent way, do away with the old feudal system and wipe out
corruption, the country can be changed into a true welfare state.

, 94. The Main Islamic Festivals (P.U.,Mul.)

1- The Introduction-The purpose of festivals in general and of religious festivals.

2- Our main religious festivals: (i) Eid-ul-Fitr-what it means, how we celebrate it. (ii)
Eid-ul-Azha. (in) Eid-Milad-un-Nabi.

3- Usefulness of the three festivals:

(0 They bring us closer. They complete Islamic culture, (ii) They bring out the spirit of
«lam in concrete form.
4- What we need to do today:

0) To act on the spirit (inner meaning) of these festivals, (ii) To examine ourselves to *d
where we are weak and what we need to do.

. The purpose of all festivals is to let the people celebrate an occasion together, to share
its J°ys and to feel united. Religious festivals unite us in our love of God as much as of
each . Most of our festivals are religious.
264

B.fl. 6nglish Simple Grammar & Compo

Writing

Our main religious and social festivals are Eid-ul-Fitre, Eid-ul-Azha and Eid Milad Nabi.
We celebrate them together each year with grate joy and zeal or passion.

”Eid-ul-Fitr” is celebrated after the holy month of Ramazan is over. It means ”reward”
that’is given to us in the form of joy, satisfaction and hope after we have fasted for one fi
i month. We have the satisfaction of having purified ourselves, bodily and spiritually ty
feel happier in our kindness and help to others. Every Muslim who has to means is to gi
C a certain amount of wheat or its value in money to the needy. We can give more. e

The Eid day rightly begins by giving the ”Fitrana,” grains or money, to the poor and bv
saying the Eid prayers together. The gates to unlimited happiness open to us, in our hearts
if not in the material world so much. We embrace and greet each other in joy. Relatives
and friends visit each other giving the ”Eidi” (Eid money) to children and the loved ones
(Children play madly and run and jump wildly in the open places. When the grown-ups
look at them in activity, they feel as if the world was never going to end for them
”Silence and slow time” would never sadden them. As the day draws to a close, we have
Eid parties here and there. And, again, presents and good wishes are exchanged.

”Eid-ul-Azha” means the festival of sacrifice. It is the festival that celebrates Hazrat
Ibrahim’s attempt to sacrifice his son and his actual sacrifice of a sheep. Every Muslim,
who has to means, is to sacrifice an animal in the way of God, after the

Eid prayers.

At least one-third of the meat of the sacrificed animal is to be distributed among the
needy. The rest of the two-third meat can be shared by the family, relatives and
neighbours of the owner of the animal. Here again we share our meat with others and
show our generosity. Our joys cannot be complete without it. hi this way, we show
practically that we are ready to sacrifice our all for God, for our ”din” (religion) or for the
society or the country if it so demands.

”Eid Milad-un-Nabi” means the festival on the birthday of our Holy Prophet (may peace
be upon him). It is celebrated in memory of our greatest leader who showed the world the
right path of Islam. We celebrate the successes of Islam by remembering the Prophet’s
mission on earth.

On Eid Milad-un-Nabi the cities, towns anc villages are decorated with beautiful
multicoloured arches, flags and flowers. At niglt, people illuminate (decorate with bright
lights) their homes, and the government illuminates public buildings. ”Milad”
processions are taken out on the roads. Meetings are held to discuss the Holy Prophet’s
character and mission. Special ”qirat” contests (of the recitation of the Holy Quran) are
also held at selected places. We can also witness generous people distributing food and
things of daily use among the needy.

All the three Islamic festivals bring us closer and show us our common path and aims.
They are the outer expression of our inner belief and faith. The inner faith and the outer
expression, in this sense, make up Islamic culture. The outer expression includes our
customs, ways of life, our buildings, the most sacred (holy) beings the House of God (the
mosque).

The Islamic festivals, in fact, bring out the spirit of Islam in concrete form. They show
that we can be truly happy if we live a life of purity, hard work, w jrship and generosity.
Social happiness depends on sharing each other’s joys and sorrow^ as advised by God an
the Holy Prophet (peace be upon him). .,

What we need today is to act on the spirit of these festivals. We should fast and purity
ourselves during the holy month of Ramazan. We should generously help others and a
nobly to qualify for the ”Eid-ul-Fitr.” We should be prepared to make the &eaie*e
sacrifice for our religion, for our honour and our ”Ummat” (the Islamic nation) as w learn
from the ”Eid-ul-Azha.”

95. Why Interest-Free Banking

1. The Introduction-Bringing our economy in line with the Islamic system.

265

2 Meaning of ”interest” in Arabic. *’ Some main disadvantages of interest.

4 Interest-free banking in our country.

It was to bring our economy in line with the Islamic system that efforts were made to
have interest-free banking.

”Interest” in Arabic is ”riba” which means interest charged on the money lent for a fixed
t’rne The borrower has to return the main amount with the interest that can become too
much with the passage of time. Islam permits trade without interest. It means that those
who invest in a business or lend money to others for business, should share its profit or

Let us discuss some main disadvantages of interest. First, the borrower finds it very
difficult to return the main amount when the interest itself becomes too much with time.
Second, the lenders go on becoming richer at the cost of the borrowers. They become part
of the capitalist class and begin taking advantage of the economic problems of the poor.
This results in intolerable differences between the different classes in society. Third, the
capital in society gathers at interest-giving centres like banks or other investment
.agencies. The banks begin lending money on greater interest. The circulation of money
in society becomes limited to certain channels. The common people do not benefit from
the activities of the bankers and capitalists.
The interest-giving agencies begin controlling investments in business by changing the
rates of interest. Society, as a whole, suffers when prices rise because of less production
and high rates of interest.

Interest-free banking was introduced in the country in 1982. Now, account holders share
the profits and losses of the banks. They do not get fixed interest on their deposits. The
rates of profit are determined by the banks in accordance on their business, with the main
control vesting in (in the charger of) the State Bank of Pakistan. The banks operate
savings deposits and term deposits for fixed durations of time.

96. The Pakistan Ideology (or) Pakistan as an Islamic State (Pun., Mul.)

1. The Introduction-Pakistan was created as an Islamic State.

2. The basis of Pakistan is Islam. It means:

(i) The laws of the country should be based on the Holy Quran and the Sunnah. (ii)
Nothing in the country should be in conflict with (nothing should go against) Islam and
its principles.

(Hi) There should be justice and equality.

(iv) We need to teach the Pakistan ideology.

3- All the people, whether they are Muslims or not, should have freedom to progress in
all fields. The rights of every religious community should be guaranteed.
4. The Conclusion-We need to follow our ideology in the true spirit.

Pakistan came into being in 1947 after a long struggle. The Indian Muslims had been
lighting against the English and the Hindus for centuries to have an Islamic State where
toey could have a full growth of their culture.

Islam, as a complete code of life, can guide the Muslims in private as well as public
Batters. The Holy Quran and the Sunnah (practices of the Holy Prophet) can guide us in
training our private and public laws in all-important matters. The laws of the country
should, therefore, be based on the Holy Quran and the Sunnah.

Hie people know and feel that Islam promises them a bright future in this world as well s
in the next. If they perform their religious and social duties regularly according to their
e”gion, society will prosper (progress and grow rich). Therefore, we should not only *ye
Islamic laws but their enforcement in effective way.

We should not permit anything in society that goes against (is in conflict with) Islam ^d
its principles. We should, firstly, trv to repeal (canceH all «nrh \** ** °»
j6 B-H. English Simple Grammar & Composite

ith Islam. Secondly, we should start a powerful campaign (movement) to train the minds f
the people in favour of their ideology. We should tell them, through the press, the radio V
and speeches, all that is Islamic and not Islamic.

Our progress depends on social justice and equality. Justice means equality before the iw
and equal rewards and punishments. However highly placed a person may be, he hould
be answerable for his bad deeds. All the people, rich and poor alike, should have qual
chances of making progress in any field they like. For example, intelligent and able ioor
students should be admitted to the best educational institutions.

We need to teach the Pakistan ideology correctly and completely. Our education, from lie
school to the university level, should have a regular pattern of ideological studies. The
;ourses related to-these studies should be interesting.

All the people, whether they are Muslims or not should have freedom to progress in all
kids of national life. The law should guarantee the rights of every religious community.

We can become truly great if we follow our ideology in the true spirit. Surely, we can
ivoid all the dangerous developments that took ideological states like Hitler’s Germany,
vlussolini’s Italy and Lenin’s Soviet Union to disintegration or destruction. Though they
managed to become world powers within a short period, their downfall was no less quick.
We should avoid their inflexibility dictatorial ways. We, with a more meaningful and
flexible ideology can more meaningful and flexible ideology can reach the pinnacle (the
highest point) of success, this worldly as well as the otherworldly.
97. Pakistan and the Islamic World (P.U.)

Pakistan has rightly been the hub or the centre of importance for the entire Islamic world
since her independence in 1947. The purpose of this essay is to examine the special
relationship of Pakistan with other Islamic countries and the role she can play in this

context.

Firstly, Pakistan shares with most of the Islamic world the past of foreign rule (or
domination). Just as Pakistanis gained independence after tremendous struggles and
sacrifices, the brave people of Turkey, Iran, Iraq, Syria, Jordan, Morocco, Algeria,
Indonesia, Malaysia, etc. won their freedom. Just as after independence Pakistan had to
face the injustices of stronger and bigger countries to her in various forms, the other
Islamic countries had to undergo (pass through) similar experiences. For example, India
imposed wars on Pakistan because she had failed to solve the Kashmir problem according
to her promises to the UNO. India had been constructing dams across the rivers flowing
into Pakistan taking an unjustly much of our water share. Then diplomatically and
politically she always opposed us at all important international forums (places for public
discussion) like those of the SAARC (South Asian Association for Regional
Cooperation), the conferences of the non-aligned group of nations, and sessions of the
UNO. So the Arab world has been a victim of European and American machinations
(schemes). Right in its heart, the independent state of Israel was created, strengthened and
developed to become a constant threat to its very existence. In order to have a constant
flow of oil from the Arab states, the western powers exercise military as well as political
control over the Middle East governments. They do not let the Arabs use their oil weapon
in their own defence even. The long rule of western powers and their constant support to
their own choice of rulers have kept most of the people of the Arab and other Muslim
countries uneducated, uniformed and backward.

Almost all the Arab and Muslim states maintain out-dated political and social systems
which are either monarchical or dictatorial. In these countries the common people are,
more or less, like the common people of Pakistan-dumb spectators of a silent game, the
game being one of the politics of the rich and the influential. So the Islamic countries

essay Writing 267

including Pakistan have similar social and political structures that need to be changed
almost completely if they want to join the ranks of advanced countries. Pakistan has the
capacity to become truly democratic and advanced to be a living example for the rest of
the Islamic world. It is so because a sizeable section of her population is well versed in
English, is familiar with western science and technology and western democratic and
economic institutions.

98. Muslim Unity (or) The Commonwealth of Muslim Countries (or) Pan-Islamism

1. The Introduction-The unity of Muslims in the entire world is needed.

2. Muslim unity is so much needed today.

(a) In the religions field . (b) In the military field, (c) In the scientific field, (d) In the
economic field, (e) In the political field, (f) In the cultural field.

3. Having a world Muslim organization like the UNO.

4. Muslims can become a world power.

5. The Conclusion-It is now that Muslims can do something great-’Now or never’. The
unity of Muslims the entire world over is the need of the hour. Only unity can bring

them the glory that the” world of Islam once enjoyed. Theirs will then be a third world
bloc (of Muslim countries) that may be as powerful as the capitalistic bloc or individual
world powers like Communist China.

Firstly, Muslims should be united in the religious field. Their belief in God and the Quran
is the true basis for their unity. They should not allow the differences of sects (or classes)
to affect it. The Muslims in all corners of the world have the same aims-to live a good life
in this world and to have a better life in the next.

The Muslim countries should try to make joint arrangements for their defence. Almost all
of them are surrounded by powerful enemies. They can become a world power if they all
come to have a joint defence system.

The Muslims will have to make tremendous (extraordinary) scientific progress to become
a big military power. They need great scientists who can invent new weapons of war.
They need modern science laboratories where they can carry out advanced scientific
research. However, for this they should have scientific education of the highest order.

The Muslim countries should co-operate in the economic field as much as possible. It
means that they should have common industrial and trade policies. One Muslim country
may easily use the capital or funds of another richer country for setting up factories and
industrial plants. The raw materials of one country can easily be used in another.

Politically, the Muslim countries should have common policies. They should support each
oJherTrr world bodies like the United Nations Organizations (UNO). They should offer
full support to a country that has a dispute with another country outside the Muslim
world.

Muslims may have a world Muslim organization like the UNO. Or they may have a
Commonwealth of Muslim States. A secretariat of Muslim States is no doubt functioning.
It arranges summits or conferences of Muslim States in central Muslim cities. It also tries
to bring them closer in the political, economic and cultural fields. Yet, there should be a
more powerful central Muslim organization with wider powers to bring their disputes or
wars (like the Iran-Iraq war) to an end.

The people of one Muslim country should try to learn the language of another. There
should be a free exchange of scholars, writers, teachers, scientists and students between
them. The radio, television, films, newspapers and magazines (the mass media) can play a
useful role in bringing Muslims closer.
KOO

B.fl. english Simple Grammar & Compositi0n Scientists, chemists and agricultural
experts have made use of science for greater agricultural production. They have invented
new machines in. the form of tractors threshers (for separating the grain), tube-well
engines, and so on. It is possible to sow, grow and reap (cut) crops in extremely quick
ways now. Different types of fertilizers and salts (developed by scientists) increase the
production of food grains a lot. Engineers have build big dams across rivers and changed
their courses making it possible to provide water to vast areas of land and to produce
electricity on a large scale.

We can mass-produce things of daily use like sewing-needles, shaving blades and electric
lamps with machines developed by scientists and technical experts. Machines like
refrigerators, coolers and air-conditioners for our comfort and pleasure are also the result
of their efforts.

Now space travel and visits to the moon are possible because of the great scientific
progress of our century.

99. The Hajj (Holy Pilgrimage) (P.U.)

1. The Introduction-The meaning of the ”hajj” as one of the pillars of Islam.

2. The journey to Mecca. Arrival and preparations for the ”hajj.”

3. The ”hajj” described.

4. Benefits of performing the ”hajj.”

5. The Conclusion-We should perform the ”hajj” if we can afford it.

The hajj is one of the five pillars of Islam. These pillars are the fundamental (basic) ituals
(ceremonial observations and devotions), and they make up the individual’s faith. Hie
shahada is the first pillar that means affirmation of the Absolute Oneness of Allah and >f
the fact the Muhammad (peace be upon him) is His Servant and Messenger. Salatis the
•econdpillar of the faith. It means the performance of prayers in the set manner. ”Zakat”
brms the thirdpillar of the faith. It means ”purification” as the Muslim who pays 2.50 per
ent of his total savings and assets (property and funds) to the needy each year, thus,
’urifies his wealth and himself. Siyam, the fast, is the fourth pillar, and, as we know, the
/hole month of Ramazan is devoted to it. The hajj, the fifth pillar, is the last of the
evotional stages of the Muslim in his relationship with God.

The hajj is, in another sense, the highest point (culmination) of all the prayers and
iligious ceremonies that bring the believer closest to God. Ceremoniously, it involves ve
rites that a pilgrim has to perform. Namely, the tawafthe circumambulation of the ’aaba
(going round and about it), the sa’/, the trekking (making a long hard walk) back id forth
between the hills of Safa and Marwa, the waqufor the standing at Arafat; the Mya or the
ritual of sacrifice; and thejamarafor the stoning of the Devil. These rites are
1 performed in Makkah and its surroundings up to 180 to 260 kilometres on all sides. As
e Kaaba lies at the centre of Makkah, the five rites performed here stand for the central
•Hefs of Islam. For example, the tawafis the faithful’s clear admission and affirmation of
s complete submission to the centre, to the House of God and to God Himself. Hie rituals,
which include wearing a special garment by all pilgrims, represent unity and mbleness.
Without much hair on the head, and wearing a loose sheet of cloth, the grim moves
steadily onwards.

rhe hajj has incomparable benefits for the Muslim community all over the world. rgtfy, it
brings together Muslims from the Far East (Indonesia, Malaysia, etc.) to East i West
Africa (Morocco), from America to Australia and Russia to South America. It ;i!y
internationalises Islam and establishes religious and social links between Muslims erever
they may be coming from. If the spirit of the haj/\s truly grasped or understood, ^11 be
impossible for the Muslims of one country or nation to oppose or confront those

£ssoV Writing

Of another country. Unluckily, the hajj is not performed by quite a few Muslims
genuinely and devotedly. The result of all the exercise they undertake (that is, of the
performance of the rites) is that when they return as hajjis from Mecca, they do not
behave as piously as they should. How strange it is that a person goes Saudi Arabia for
the hajj, and returns vvith a lot of gold and articles of luxury in all his pride, thus proving
to be worldly-wise (experienced in the ways of the world)! The value of the hajj, as in
prayers and fasting, lies in piety, simplicity and nobility and a distancing from worldly
interests and the chief

sin of pride.

”The economic, cultural and political importance of this major annual gathering of
Muslims from around the world has further increased with the advent (coming) of
telecommunications and transport technologies...” The Columbia Encyclopaedia from «
which this bright quotation comes should also have referred to the hard times when
pilgrims used to arrive in Saudi Arabia on ship. Then, from the southern coast, they rode
camels and horses to reach Mecca across the sprawling (stretching far into the distance)
dry desert. Many fell ill on the way, and many died, and those who returned as hajjis
were schooled in wisdom, humility and humaneness.’

Secondly, the hajj provides a unique (unexampled) opportunity to the pilgrim to be in

perfect communication (communion) with God in his personal capacity. On the plain of
Arafat, the pilgrim performs the rite of Wuqufor standing. Here he reviews his whole past
and bares it before God in absolute submission for His forgiveness. Thus purified, he
feels confident of nearness to God and separated (distanced) from evil. The place is holy
because here Hazrat Muhammad (peace be upon him) had addressed his followers during
his last pilgrimage.

Thirdly, the hajj corresponds to the ”Eid-ul-Azha,” that is, the day of sacrifice in
remembrance of Abraham’s readiness to sacrifice his son on God’s behest (orders). And,
in this sense, the haj/is a sacrifice of personal comfort and wealth that the pilgrim offers.
He, in fact, offers himself and his all to the Creator in return for His merciful forgiveness
and favour of His blessings. The hajj symbolizes man’s spiritual and emotional readiness
to destroy the body and all that goes by the name of money and property. It provides a
rare chance to rise above family connections even to enter into a relationship with God.

Fourthly, the hajj provides the supreme spiritual experience when the pilgrim enters the
Haram, the Holy Mosque, and stands before the Kaaba. The Kaaba represents man’s
submissiveness to God. The Kaaba is the House of God, and it belongs to all history. It is
a living link between the other world and this. The pilgrim feels the greatness and glory
of God Almighty in its silent and simple structure. He feels supremely satisfied in paying
respects to this holiest of shrines, and carries with him an experience of closeness to God

forthe rest of his life.

Then afterwards, the pilgrim visits the Holy Prophet’s Mosque in Medina. He feels
further encouraged by the life and lessons of Hazrat Muhammad (peace be upon him). As
he prays in this mosque, he has a feeling of the vital relationship with the Last Prophet
(peace be upon him) who is to him the greatest support and help in all his weaknesses of

this worldly life.

All these experiences, and more that all are beyond description and discussion, contribute
to the pilgrim’s total purification, inward and outward. When he returns to the sea of daily
corruptions and impurities, he can easily sail on the boat of faith to the everlasting life of
heaven.